JP6747548B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a communication state in which one ends of a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough and a separated state in which they are separated from each other are formed. ing. (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-171636, A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to stably send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member. To do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a first passage member and a second passage member formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced, A communication state in which one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other so that a ball can be delivered from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member has the second passage In a gaming machine in which a first passage member and a second passage member are separated from one end of the passage member and a separated state in which the first passage member and the second passage member are not communicated with each other can be formed, one end of the first passage member or the second passage member is provided. A connection member that is displaceably disposed and that allows one end of the first passage member and the second passage member to communicate with each other in a state in which the first passage member and the second passage member are in contact with each other and displaced. If, comprising a biasing means for maintaining in position by applying a biasing force to the connection member, wherein one of the first passage member or second channel member, Ru provided with a storage portion for storing the connection member ..

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a board box.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member .

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the board can be housed in the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of an upper lift unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. It is a front view of an upper lifting unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper part lifting unit. It is a rear surface disassembled perspective view of an upper lift unit. (A) is a front view of a 1st gear, (b) is a rear view of a 1st gear, (c) is a front view of a 2nd gear, (d) is a 2nd gear FIG. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front view of a lifting body and a transmission device. It is a front perspective view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a drive side slide member. It is a rear view of a drive side slide member. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member when viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is an arrow of FIG. It is a rear view of the connecting member when viewed in the XXVIc direction. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a rear view of a 2nd passage formation member and a connection member. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal lifting unit when viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front perspective view of a game board and a left swing unit. It is a front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rocking motion unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a rocking motion unit. It is a front view of a rocking motion unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit and a left swing unit. It is a partial front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit and a left swing unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of the rotation unit in the state where the guide member was removed. It is a front perspective view of the rotation unit in the state where the guide member was removed. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit in the state where a rotation member, a part of pitching device, and a guide member were removed. It is a front schematic diagram of a guide member. 51A is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation member, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view of the one-side rotation member and the other-side rotation member taken along line LIb-LIb in FIG. 51A. is there. It is a sectional view of a rotation unit cut by a plane containing a rotation axis of a central transmission member. It is a front view of a case member and a drive mechanism. 54A is a front view of the rotating member, and FIG. 54B is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in FIG. 54A. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG. 54(b). (A) is a front perspective view of a division member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a division member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a division member. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a division member. (A) And (b) is a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of a division member in the state where it is arranged in the 1st section. (A) And (b) is a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of a division member in the state where it is arranged in the 2nd section. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a pitching device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an arm rotation mechanism. It is a front view of the pitching device in the state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism is arranged at the holding position. It is a front view of the pitching device in a state where the arm member of the arm rotation mechanism is arranged at the separated position. FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the protruding position. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the holding piece is arranged at the retracted position. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the retaining piece is arranged at the projecting position, and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the holding piece retracting mechanism taken along the line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in Fig. 68(a). FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism in a state where the retaining piece is arranged at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the retaining piece retracting mechanism taken along the line LXIXb-LXIXb in Fig. 69(a). FIG. It is a front perspective view of a guide member. It is a rear perspective view of a guide member. It is a front view of a guide member and a rotation member. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the first section, and (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member and the rotating member in the second section. (A) to (d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member is rotated by 30 degrees. FIG. 9 is a state relationship diagram showing a relationship between the engagement state and the release state of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member with respect to the split member and the phase. (A)-(c) is a state transition diagram for every unit rotation amount of a rotating member. It is a partially expanded side view which expanded the part in the 1st area of a rotating member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the left swing unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (b) is a top view of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (c) is in the line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 79 (b). It is sectional drawing of the main body member of a front-end wall member, (d) is a front view of the main body member of a front-end wall member. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. It is a front view of a left swing unit. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the left swing unit and the liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of the liquid crystal raising/lowering unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. It is a front view of a liquid crystal lifting unit. (A) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a drive side slide member in arrow LXXXIXb direction view of (a) of FIG. 89, (c) FIG. 6 is a partial front view of a drive side slide member.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape and an outer frame 11 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down on the front surface of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front face frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. The ball is fired with the strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with the jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 54b is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a "thousand box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and general winning a prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Mounted on the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed by tapping screws from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by partitioning two rails 61 and 62 on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in positive change, shortening time, or normal by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of big jackpot is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability variation. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor time saving (state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is improved).

During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than in the normal case. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times of the jackpot lottery can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probable change or shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal state. Also, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a opens at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. Moreover, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric prize 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning opening 640. , The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (extended state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retraction). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (retracted state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the shortening of the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability that the jackpot is the same when the ball is won at the first winning opening 64 and when it is won at the second winning opening 640 is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize in the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a sudden change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

A second variable winning device 82a is arranged on the upper left of the first winning port 64, and a second specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot win the second specific winning port 82. On the other hand, when a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot), the second variable winning device is opened (in an expanded state), so that the ball is in a special game state in which it is easy to win the second specific winning opening 82. You can

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times in a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. Alternatively, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the game area that have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

The input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

6 and 7, the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position is shown in FIG. 9, and in FIG. 9, the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 and the first passage forming member of the left swing unit 500 are shown. FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 600 is arranged in a raised position, and FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 600 is connected. Further, FIGS. 6 to 10 show the state in which the upper elevating unit 300 is arranged in the raised position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 10, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 210 formed in a box shape, and an upper elevating unit 300, a liquid crystal elevating unit 400, and a left swing unit in the inner space of the rear case 210. 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emission decoration member 700 are each accommodated.

The rear case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 212 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 211 toward the front surface. It is formed in a box shape with one side open. The bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 is provided with a concave portion having a substantially circular frontal shape in the center thereof, and the rotary unit 600 is housed in the concave portion. The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the rotating unit 600, and the upper elevating unit 300, the left swing unit 500, and the decorative light emitting member 700 include the upper edge portion, the left edge portion, and the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. Are arranged in each part.

The upper lifting unit 300 includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) lifting bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 8), and these lifting bodies 330 are independently arranged in the height direction (FIG. 8). It is formed so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 12 and 13). In a state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position, when the lifting body 330 is arranged in the raised position, almost the entire surface of the third symbol display device 81 is visible (see FIG. 8), while the lifting body is lifted. When 330 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 12 ), a part of the third symbol display device 81 is invisible due to the elevating body 330.

The liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in a vertical posture with its axis extending in the vertical direction, and is provided with a pair of guide bars 451 arranged at a predetermined interval in the width direction, and both ends in the width direction of the guide bar 451. The driving-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are slidably supported, and the driving motor 441 that drives the driving-side slide member 420 up and down. The driving motor 441 drives the driving-side slide member 420 up and down. As a result, the driven-side slide member 430 is driven and moved up and down.

That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 is raised, the drive-side slide member 420 pushes the driven-side slide member 430 upward while resisting the action of gravity, while the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered. First, the driven-side slide member 430 is lowered by its own weight as the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered.

The drive-side slide member 420 is provided with the second passage forming member 422, and the driven-side slide member 430 is provided with the FIG. 3 side display device 81. When the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position between the ascending position and the descending position, the second passage forming member 422 can be connected to the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 (Fig. 9). Further, when the drive side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the upper region of the third symbol display device 81 is arranged on the back side of the upper elevating unit 300 (see FIG. 10).

The left swing unit 500 includes a first passage forming member 520 that swings in a direction in which the tip end side is moved up and down around the base end side. When the first passage forming member 520 is swung in the direction of lifting the front end side, the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9), and the front end side is connected to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400, When the tip end side is swung in the swinging direction, it is placed at the release position (see FIG. 10) and the connection with the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is released.

The ball flowing down the game area is allowed to flow into the left swing unit 500, and the left swing unit 500 is flowed in when the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 9). The ball is sent to the second passage forming member 422 of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 via the first passage forming member 520, while the first passage forming member 520 is in the release position (see FIG. 10). The inflowing sphere is delivered to the game area through a passage, which will be described later, provided separately from the first passage forming member 520.

The rotation unit 600 is a production device configured to imitate a roulette wheel. That is, a member (rotating member 640) corresponding to a rotatably formed wheel (rotating plate), and a red or black color formed by partitioning the wheel in the circumferential direction and different numbers are displayed. A portion corresponding to a pocket (display plate 646 and partition plate 647), and a ball B thrown from a device (throwing device 650) on the inner peripheral side of the wheel corresponds to a plurality of pockets. It is formed to fall on either.

In a state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 8 ), almost the entire rotation unit 600 is shielded by the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 invisible to the player, while the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is in the connecting position. In the arranged state (see FIG. 9), a part (lower part) of the member corresponding to the wheel is exposed, and in the state in which the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is arranged in the raised position (see FIG. 10), the wheel is In addition to a part (lower part) of the corresponding member, the ball B held on the inner peripheral side of the member corresponding to the wheel and the path from the pitch of the ball B to the drop to the part corresponding to the pocket are It is exposed and these are visible to the player.

The light-emitting decoration member 700 includes a case body made of a light-transmissive material and a plurality of LEDs arranged inside the case body, and has a mode of light emitted from the LED (for example, of a light-emitting LED). By changing the number and the light emission time), the effect by light emission is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11 to FIG. 20, detailed configurations of the upper lift unit 300, the liquid crystal lift unit 400, the left swing unit 500, the rotation unit 600, and the light emitting decoration member 700 will be described. First, the upper elevating unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 20.

FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIGS. 12 and 13 are front views of the upper lifting unit 300. Note that FIGS. 11 and 12 show a state in which all the elevating bodies 330 arranged side by side in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 12) are arranged at the ascending position, and in FIG. 13, all the elevating bodies 330 descend. The state of being placed in position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, in the upper elevating unit 300, a plurality of elevating bodies 330 (four in the present embodiment) are arranged in the width direction of the base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and each elevating body 330 is provided. It is configured to be movable up and down between a raised position (see FIG. 12) and a lowered position (see FIG. 13). Next, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the configuration of the drive mechanism of each elevating body 330 will be described.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear exploded perspective view of the upper lifting unit 300.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the upper elevating unit 300 includes a base member 310 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, and a space for accommodating the transmission device 350 is provided between the base member 310 and the base member 310. A back cover 320 that is fastened and fixed to the back side; an elevating body 330 in which a rack 332 is housed between the base member 310 and the back cover 320 and a circular effect part 331 is arranged on the front side of the base member 310; A driving device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the back cover member 320 to generate a driving force necessary for the lifting/lowering operation of the lifting body, and a transmission device 350 that transfers the driving force generated by the driving device 340 to the lifting/lowering body 330 are mainly described. Prepare

The cover member 310 has a semicircular concave portion 311 having a semicircular shape in which the center of a circle is arranged at the lower end and is concave from the front side surface to the rear surface side, and the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 from the rear side surface. A guide rib 312 is provided so as to project in a rib shape toward a position with a slight gap left and right.

The semicircular recessed portion 311 has a radius slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rendering portion 331 of the lifting body 320, and the center of the circle of the semicircular recessed portion 311 and the center of the rendering portion 331 are vertical lines. Are placed at the same position. Thereby, when the effect part 331 moves upward, it becomes possible to move to the front side of the base member 310 before the position where it interferes with the semi-circular recessed part 311 and the vertical width of the base member 310 is secured. It is also possible to secure a large upward movement width of the rendering unit 331.

The guide rib portion 312 is a rib-shaped portion that extends in the vertical direction, and is provided in a protruding manner up to a position where it can contact the left and right side surfaces of the rack 332 of the elevating body 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11 ). As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating body 330 from moving in the left-right direction during vertical movement (parallel movement or tilting operation).

Further, by forming the semicircular recessed portion 311 as a recessed portion that is recessed from the front side to the back side, the area where the back side cannot be visually recognized is widened as compared with the case where the space penetrates in the front-back direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large area for disposing a mechanical portion (a portion not intended to be visually recognized by the player, such as a gear or a motor).

The back cover 320 includes a main body 321 formed in a case shape with the front side and the lower side open, a columnar shaft support 322 protruding from the main body 321 to the front side, and a front support from the shaft support 322. A guide hole 323, which is a long hole formed in a position displaced in the left-right direction as viewed in a state in which the extending direction is aligned with the vertical direction, and a shaft support part from a bottom part around which the upper shaft support part 322 is projectingly provided. And a locking portion 324 that is formed in a rib shape and is provided along the radial direction of 322.

The shaft support portion 322 is a portion that respectively supports the pair of gear members 351 and 352 of the transmission device 350, and the guide hole 323 is a hole that guides the lifting operation of the lifting body 330.

The locking portions 324 are disposed vertically above and vertically below the shaft of the upper shaft support portion 322, and when the elevating body 330 is in the ascending position or the descending position, respectively. The end portion of the locking arc portion 351c of the gear 351 is a portion that can abut in the rotation direction.

The elevating body 330 includes a rendering unit 331 configured in a circular plate shape, and a rack 332 fixed to the back surface of the rendering unit 331 and vertically extending at a position spaced from the rear side surface of the rendering unit 331. , Is provided.

The production section 331 is a section in which a circular liquid crystal panel is arranged inside a circular outer frame, and a production is performed by displaying patterns and figures on the liquid crystal panel.

The rack 332 includes a slide shaft 332 a that is provided so as to be convex on the back surface side and that is provided so as to project to a position where it is inserted into the guide hole 323 of the back cover 320.

A plurality of slide shafts 332a are not provided in a protruding manner, but one is provided in a protruding manner. Therefore, the number of the guide holes 323 arranged can be reduced to one (reduced), so that a large movement distance of the rack 332 can be secured while suppressing the installation space of the guide holes 323 in the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 332 can contact the guide rib portion 312 in the left-right direction, even if the rack 332 is connected to the guide hole 323 at only one position, the rack 332 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent leaning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect part 331 from swinging in the left-right direction when the elevating body 330 moves up and down, and to prevent the spacing between the second gear 352 and the rack 332 from fluctuating to deteriorate the meshing relationship. be able to.

The drive device 340 includes a drive motor 341 that is a drive source that is fastened and fixed to the back cover 320, and a drive gear 342 that is rotated by the rotation of the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 and that transmits the drive force to the transmission device 350. ..

The transmission device 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322 and is meshed with the drive gear 342, and the first gear 351 is meshed with the first gear 351 and the rack 332 and is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 322. And a second gear 352.

In this way, since the plurality of (four in the present embodiment) lifting bodies 330 each include independent drive motors 341, in addition to the operation of raising and lowering all the lifting bodies 330 in conjunction, It can be lifted and lowered individually. Since the technical concept of each lifting/lowering body 330 is common, the lifting/lowering body 330 arranged at the left end of FIG. 11 will be described below, and the description of the other lifting/lowering bodies 330 will be omitted.

Next, the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 will be described with reference to FIG. 16A is a front view of the first gear 351, FIG. 16B is a rear view of the first gear 351, and FIG. 16C is a front view of the second gear 352. 16D is a rear view of the second gear 352.

As shown in FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), the first gear 351 has a through hole into which the shaft support 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and a main body 351a having gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. And an overhanging length of about half the tooth height of the gear tooth on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 351a where gear tooth formation is omitted (overhanging up to the pitch circle C1 connecting the contact points of the meshing teeth). Abutment portion 351b that is formed to extend in the radial direction with the overhang length), and locking that is convexly provided in an arc shape centering on the axis from the rear side surface of the main body section 351a in a direction parallel to the axis. And an arc portion 351c.

The abutting portion 351b has a radial end surface in an arc shape with a radius r around the center axis of the main body 351a, and has a tooth thickness (arc) of two to three gear teeth formed in the main body 351a. The angle formed by the center of is about 45 to 60 degrees). That is, since the formation length in the circumferential direction of the main body 351a is longer than the tooth thickness of one gear tooth, the strength in the circumferential direction can be secured as compared with the gear tooth of the main body 351a.

The locking arc portion 351c is a portion whose circumferential tip can abut the locking portion 324 (see FIG. 14) of the back cover 320 in the circumferential direction, and regulates the rotation angle of the first gear 351. There is a role.

As shown in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the second gear 352 is composed of two layers of gears having different tooth shapes on the front side and the back side, and is an intermediate plate 353 configured in a donut plate shape. And a deformed gear portion 354 formed on the front side of the intermediate plate 353 and having a partially different tooth profile, and a spur gear formed on the back side of the intermediate plate 353 and meshed with a rack 332 (see FIG. 15). And a transmission gear portion 355.

The intermediate plate 352 is formed so as to project radially outward from the tips of the gear teeth of the odd-shaped gear portion 354 and the transmission gear portion 355. Therefore, the mating member (the first gear 351 or the rack 332 (see FIG. 15)) to be meshed can be brought into contact by overlapping in the direction parallel to the tooth surface (see FIG. 17), and the mating member can move up and down. It is possible to suppress movement in a direction parallel to the tooth surface when the 330 is moved up and down.

The deformed gear portion 354 is a portion that meshes with the first gear 351 in the assembled state (see FIG. 11 ), has a through hole through which the shaft support portion 322 (see FIG. 14) is inserted, and has gear teeth on the outer peripheral surface. The formed main body portion 354a, the receiving portion 354b that is formed overhanging on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a where gear teeth are not formed, and one end of the receiving portion 354b (on the right side in FIG. 16C). An adjacent gear tooth 354c adjacent to the end portion).

The receiving portion 354b is a counterclockwise side view from the adjacent gear tooth 354c along the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 354a (the side where the first gear 351 is engaged with the adjacent gear portion 354c when the elevating body 330 is moved upward). ) At an arrangement angle of about two gear teeth (about 30 to 50 degrees), the tip surface of the contact portion 351b when the transmission device 350 is axially supported by the shaft support portion 322. A curved wall portion 354b1 curved along an arcuate shape of a radius r formed between the curved wall portion 354b1 and the tooth surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c in the circumferential direction. And a connecting wall portion 354b2 formed with a tooth height (tooth height that extends to the pitch circle C2 that connects the contact points of the teeth to be meshed with each other). Therefore, the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the side of the connecting wall portion 354b2 has an overhang length that is about half the radial overhang length of the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c on the opposite side of the connecting wall portion 354b2. The connecting wall portion 354b2 is formed integrally with the connecting wall portion 354b2 so as to project radially from the connecting wall portion 354b2.

As shown in FIG. 16C, when the transmission device 350 is axially supported by the shaft support portion 322, the second gear 352 is curved along the arcuate shape of the radius r formed by the tip end surface of the contact portion 351b. When the portion 354b1 is arranged, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the circular arc having the radius r (on the side of the second gear 352) (the adjacent gear teeth 354c having the radius r). Limited to forming in a position that does not interfere with the circle).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the lifting operation of the lifting body 330 will be described. Since the raising operation and the lowering operation have the same operation path, the raising operation will be described here, and the description of the lowering operation will be omitted.

17 to 20 are front views of the lifting body 330 and the transmission device 350 in which the lifting operation of the lifting body 330 is illustrated in time series. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the elevating body 330 is disposed in the lowered position, and in FIG. 18, the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. The state where the distance increasing operation is performed and the circumferential end of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 starts to mesh with the adjacent gear tooth 354c of the second gear 352 is illustrated, and in FIG. 19, the state illustrated in FIG. Therefore, the state immediately after the first gear 351 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view and the second gear 352 is rotated clockwise in the front view and the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c are disengaged is shown. 20. FIG. 20 shows a state in which only the first gear 351 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the elevating body 330 is moved up and down by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) to the rack 332 via the drive gear 342 and the transmission device 350. It More specifically, the driving force of the drive gear 342 is transmitted from the first gear 351 meshed with the drive gear 342 to the deformed gear portion 354 of the second gear 352 meshed with the first gear 351. The rotation of the second gear 352 is transmitted to the rack meshed with the transmission gear portion 355 (see FIG. 16D) of the second gear 352, so that the elevating body 330 moves up and down.

In the lowered position shown in FIG. 17, the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. 15) of the rack 332 is arranged at the lower end of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15) of the rear cover 320. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically prevent the rack 332 from moving further downward.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 17, the circumferential end of the locking arc portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the lower locking portion 324 of the rear cover 320 come into contact with each other, so that the first gear 351. Is mechanically prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view (direction in which the rack 332 is moved downward).

As a result, even if the drive gear 342 is excessively rotated due to poor control of the drive motor 341, and a load is generated to further rotate the first gear 351 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 17 in a front view. Since the rotation of the first gear 351 is mechanically prevented, the load thereof can be prevented from being transmitted to the second gear 352, and the situation in which the rack 332 descends can be avoided, so that the slide shaft 322a (see FIG. It is possible to prevent the slide shaft 322a or the guide hole 323 from being damaged by pressing the guide shaft (see FIG. 15) against the lower surface of the guide hole 323 (see FIG. 15).

As shown in FIG. 18, in the course of the raising/lowering operation of the lifting/lowering body 330, the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b whose circumferential thickness is larger than that of the other gear teeth meshes with the adjacent gear teeth 354c. Therefore, the load transmitted from the second gear 352 to the first gear 351 in the reverse direction (the load due to the weight of the lifting body 330) can be received by the abutting portion 351b having a higher strength than other gear teeth. The durability of the first gear 351 can be improved.

Since the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 extends to the pitch circle C1 and the connecting wall portion 354b2 of the second gear 352 extends to the pitch circle C2, the contact portion 351b is connected in the state of FIG. It is brought close to a position where it rubs against the wall portion 354b2. Therefore, the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be brought into contact with each other at a portion near the root of the adjacent gear tooth 354c, and the durability of the adjacent gear tooth 354c can be improved.

Further, since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are connected to the connecting wall portion 354b2 at one side surface in the circumferential direction, the strength against the load received from the circumferential direction is improved as compared with the other gear teeth. In other words, since the radial overhanging length of the side surface of the connecting wall portion 354b2 side is shortened, the resistance to the deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c in the direction perpendicular to the tooth height direction increases and the connecting wall portion 354c increases. Since 354b2 is integrally formed with the adjacent gear tooth 354c, the total tooth thickness of the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the connecting wall portion 354b2 as a portion receiving the force applied to the adjacent gear tooth 354c is increased. The resistance to the circumferential deformation of the adjacent gear teeth 354c increases. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the adjacent gear teeth 354c from being damaged when receiving the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the state immediately after the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, the arcuate tip end portion of the contact portion 351b and the adjacent gear tooth 354c are in contact with each other. In this state, since the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 are not in contact with each other in the circumferential direction of the first gear 351, the transmission of the driving force in the rotation direction of the first gear 351 to the second gear 352 is released. It

Therefore, the force supporting the weight of the lifting/lowering body 330 meshed with the second gear 352 is not transmitted from the first gear 351, and the lifting/lowering body 330 moves toward the falling direction, so that the second gear 352 moves the rack 332. It starts to rotate in the direction of descending operation (counterclockwise in FIG. 19).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, since the contact portion 351b is arranged in the range in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c rotate (inside the circle formed by the tips of the adjacent gear teeth 354c), the second gear When rotating 352, it is necessary to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

Since the outer peripheral shape of the contact portion 351b is an arc shape centered on the central axis of the main body portion 351a, the load applied to the outer peripheral surface of the contact portion 351b is an axial component directed toward the axial side of the first gear 351. Fa and a circumferential component Fb along the tangential direction of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 are decomposed.

The axial component Fa is not in the direction in which the first gear 351 can rotate, and when the rigidity of the first gear 351 is ensured (in a structure that does not expand or contract in the radial direction), the axial component Fa causes the abutting portion to contact. It is difficult to push 351b outside the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c.

The circumferential component Fb faces the rotation direction of the first gear 351, but since the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b contact each other at a point, sliding between the adjacent gear tooth 354c and the contact portion 351b occurs. Occurs, it is difficult for the first gear 351 to rotate, so it is difficult to push the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear tooth 354c by the circumferential component Fb.

Therefore, the adjacent gear teeth 354c are prevented from pushing the contact portion 351b to the outside of the movement locus of the adjacent gear teeth 354c, so that the second gear 352 is prevented from rotating, and the second gear 352 and The state of the lift 330 is maintained.

The abutting portion 351b and the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b are both formed in an arc shape having a radius r with the first gear 351 as the center, and as shown in FIG. Since they come into contact with each other along the direction in a face-to-face relationship, the rotation of the first gear 351 can be firmly received by utilizing the area of the entire curved wall portion 354b1. Accordingly, even if the stop of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) is delayed after the elevating body 330 reaches the raised position, it is possible to prevent the first gear 351 from over-rotating, and the drive motor 341 is stopped. Can be prevented from affecting the operation mode of the elevating body 330.

As shown in FIG. 20, the first gear 351 rotates and stops until the locking arc portion 351c abuts the upper locking portion 324. 18 to 20, since the circumferential end surface of the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 pushes the side surface of the adjacent gear tooth 354c to rotate the second gear 352, the adjacent gear tooth 354 is rotated. 354c is aligned with the second gear 352, and the state in which the adjacent gear teeth 354c abut on the tooth crests of the abutting portion 351b in the state illustrated in FIG. 20 can be reliably formed.

From the state shown in FIG. 19 to the state shown in FIG. 20, since the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, the second gear 352 is restricted from rotating in the direction in which the rack 332 is moved upward (clockwise in FIG. 20). To be done. Therefore, even when the first gear 351 rotates counterclockwise with respect to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 does not rotate together. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form the state in which the tooth crest surface of the contact portion 351b faces the adjacent gear tooth 354c.

As shown in FIG. 20, when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, the second gear 352 has the curved wall portion 354b1 along the arc shape of the radius r formed by the tip end surface of the contact portion 351b. Since the adjacent gear teeth 354c are arranged outside the arc having the radius r (on the side of the second gear 352), only the first gear 351 is rotated in the same rotation direction (from the state shown in FIG. 19). It can be rotated in the counterclockwise direction (FIG. 19).

At this time, since the tooth thickness of the contact portion 351b is made thicker than that of the other gear teeth (about two to three gear teeth), the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 is moderated. can do. That is, for example, even if the first gear 351 stops at an intermediate phase between the state shown in FIG. 19 and the state shown in FIG. 20, the relationship at the contact position between the adjacent gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b is the same. Therefore, the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted.

Further, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the second gear 352 in both directions while keeping the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear 351 gentle. That is, even if the second gear 352 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 20, the curved wall portion 354b1 of the receiving portion 354b abuts on the tooth crest of the abutting portion 351b, so that the direction of the load is described in detail above. The rotation of the second gear 352 is restricted in the same manner as when the installation gear teeth 354c and the contact portion 351b are in contact with each other. Therefore, since the rack 332 is restricted from moving in both up and down directions when the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, rattling of the elevating body 330 can be suppressed. It is difficult to perform the regulation in both the up and down directions (especially, the regulation in the ascending direction) with the conventional crank mechanism, and it is first achieved by the gear shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 as in the present embodiment. It is a thing.

As described above, due to the relationship of the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating in the state where the elevating body 330 is arranged in the raised position, and thus the elevating body 330 is rotated. It is not necessary to continue to apply the driving force of the drive motor 341 (see FIG. 14) with a magnitude equal to or greater than its own weight in order to maintain the power consumption at a raised position, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, although it is possible to maintain the lifting body 330 at the raised position by utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, in that case, there is a problem that the crank mechanism becomes large in accordance with the moving distance of the lifting body 330. there were. In the present embodiment, the crank mechanism is not necessary, and the rotation of the second gear 352 can be restricted by the relationship of the shapes of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352, so that the transmission portion can be downsized.

A method for canceling the restriction on the rotation of the second gear 352 will be described. In the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, another member that interferes with the contact portion 351b is not provided in the rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) when rotating the contact portion 351b of the first gear 351 in the opposite direction. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first gear 351 in the direction in which the elevating body 330 is moved down (clockwise direction in FIG. 20) is allowed.

When the first gear 351 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 20 to the state shown in FIG. 19 and further rotated in the same direction, the regulation of the second gear 352 in the rotation direction is released (the contact portion 351b is The tip end surface is separated from the adjacent gear teeth 354c), and the elevating body 330 can be moved downward. That is, the rotation of the first gear 351 can release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352, and the first gear 351 can perform another operation to release the rotation restriction of the second gear 352. Since it is unnecessary, the structure of the first gear 351 can be simplified.

Next, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 33. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal elevating/lowering unit 400 includes a drive-side slide member 420 that has an effect unit 422a having a circular liquid crystal portion and that moves up and down, and a member that moves up in response to the drive-side slide member 420. There is a driven side slide member 430 provided with the third symbol display device 81, and the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are connected to a common guide rod 451 and are configured to operate in the same direction. To be done.

FIG. 22 is a front exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. As shown in FIG. 22, the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 includes a base member 410 composed of a pair of long plate-shaped members, a driving-side slide member 420 configured to be vertically movable, and its driving. The driven-side slide member 430 disposed above the side-side slide member 420 and configured to be movable in the vertical direction, the drive device 440 that generates a drive force for the drive-side slide member 420 to move up and down, and the drive device 440. The transmission device 450 having a pair of guide rods 451 for transmitting the generated driving force to the driving side slide member 420 and guiding the operation of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430, and the lower end portions of the pair of base members 410. And a cover member 470 disposed on the left and right sides and the upper front side of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400. ..

The base member 410 is a body-shaped member 411 configured as a vertically long plate-shaped member, and a U-shaped concave portion that is disposed at positions vertically aligned with each other at both upper and lower ends of the body member 411 and opens to the front. The configured guide rod support portion 412 and a member arranged inside the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support portion 412 (on the side close to the other base member 410) and extending on the front side of the main body member 411. The stopper 413 and the first shaft support 414 that is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front side of the main body member 411 on the side opposite to the locking portion 413 with the vertical line drawn from the guide rod support 412 interposed therebetween, and the first shaft support 414. A lowering restricting member 415 that is axially supported by the shaft supporting portion 414 and that restricts the lowering operation of the drive-side slide member 420, and is provided below the first shaft supporting portion 414 and protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side of the body member 411. A second shaft support portion 416 and a lift restricting member 417 that is pivotally supported by the second shaft support portion 416 and that restricts the lift operation of the driven-side slide member 430 are mainly provided.

The guide rod support portion 412 is a portion that supports both ends of the guide rod 451 of the transmission device 450, and is formed with an opening width that can accommodate the guide rod 451. In the present embodiment, by fastening and fixing the cover member 470 to the base member 410, the front side opening of the guide rod support portion 412 is closed and the guide rod 451 is fixed to the guide rod support portion 412.

The locking portion 413 is a portion that vertically contacts the lower side surface of the drop prevention portion 435 of the driven-side slide member 430, and the driven-side slide member 430 further descends from the contact state. Regulate.

The lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 are members that rotate with the up-and-down motion of the drive-side slide member 420 and restrict the movement of the driven-side slide member 430, which will be described later in detail.

The drive-side slide member 420 is a member whose left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 and which is moved up and down by the sliding operation of the rack 452.

The driven-side slide member 430 does not have an independent drive unit, is supported at its left and right ends by the guide rods 451 so as to be slidable, and moves up and down by being driven by the drive-side slide member 420. The driven-side slide member 430 has a main body member 431 that has the third symbol display device 81 and is elongated in the left-right direction, a functional portion 432 disposed at both left-right ends of the main body member 431, and the functional portion thereof. A guide hole 433 which is a hole vertically formed in 432 and through which the guide rod 451 is inserted; and a hook-shaped portion 434 which is provided at a lower end portion of the functional portion 432 so as to be inclined upward in the left and right outer directions, The fall prevention portion 435 is provided mainly on the inside of the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433) and extended to the back side.

The hook-shaped part 434 is a part that is hooked on the lift restricting member 417. When the driven-side slide member 430 is arranged in the lowered position, the lift-control member 417 wraps around the engagement surface 434a, which is the upper side surface of the hook-shaped portion 434, and is hooked (see FIG. 29). It is possible to prevent the member 430 from moving in the ascending direction (for example, to prevent the member 430 from bouncing due to recoil of the fall). Further, the hook-shaped portion 434 is inclined upward, and the engaging claw portion 417e of the elevation regulating member 417 is configured in parallel with the inclination, so that the hook-shaped portion 434 and the elevation regulating member 417 are engaged with each other to move in the left-right direction. Wobble can also be suppressed.

The shape of the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (outer than the tip of the engaging claw 417e in the state shown in FIG. 29 (the portion on the right side of FIG. 29)) is based on the movement trajectory of the engaging claw 417e. Is also shaped to fit below. Therefore, even when the engaging claw portion 417e and the hook-shaped portion 434 are engaged with each other and a load is applied to each other, the rotation restricting member 417 can be rotated.

The drive device 440 includes a drive motor 441 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and a drive gear 442 that is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor.

The transmission device 450 includes a pair of guide rods 451 fixed to the guide rod support portion 412 of the base member 410, and a slide member 420 slidably supported by the guide rods 451 to fasten and fix the drive side slide member 420 and a drive gear 442. A rack 452 that meshes with the inside (the inside of the pair of drive gears 442) and a vertically long plate-shaped contact wall 453 that extends from the vicinity of the root of the rack 452 to the front side are mainly provided.

The contact wall 453 has a role of rotating the lift restricting member 417 to the release side and a role of receiving the urging force of the lift restricting member 417 to move the rack 452 away from the drive gear 442, but details will be described later. To do.

The lower front plate member 460 is bent such that the left and right ends are fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member 411 of the base member 410, and the central part is offset by a predetermined amount to the back side as compared with the left and right ends. -Shaped main body member 461, a guide hole 462 that is bored in the left half of the main body member 461 along the left-right direction (in a manner in which it rises and slopes closer to the outside), and extends above the main body member 461. And a cylindrical passage portion 463 whose upper end is opened to the front side.

The guide hole 462 is an elongated hole through which the slide shaft 423b of the wiring housing member 423 is slidably guided.

The tubular passage portion 463 is a tubular member through which a sphere can pass, and forms the second passage of the drive-side slide member 420 when the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position (see FIG. 31 ). It is a member through which a sphere that flows down through the member 422 passes.

The detailed configuration of the driving side slide member 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. 23 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, FIG. 24 is an exploded rear perspective view of the drive side slide member 420, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the drive side slide member 420.

As shown in FIG. 23 to FIG. 25, the drive-side slide member 420 is a disc having a main body member 421 configured as a plate member that is long in the left-right direction and a rendering unit 422a configured by a circular liquid crystal. A second passage forming member 422 in which a portion is fastened and fixed to the central portion of the main body member 421 from the front side, and a groove through which a sphere can pass is extended from the disc portion to the left in front view, and a second flow path thereof. One end of the forming member 422 is axially supported at the lower left end of the front view and the other end is supported by the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460, and the second flow path forming member 422. And a connection member 424 that has a passage portion that is axially supported by and that penetrates along the circumferential direction of the shaft and that serves as a portion that introduces a sphere into the groove portion 422b of the second flow path forming member 422.

The main body member 421 is open to the front side in a guide portion 421a forming a part of a tubular portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted and a portion extending leftward in front view from the central portion. Mainly includes a groove portion 421b which is inclined downward to the left in a mode and a discharge opening portion 421c which is formed at the lower left end portion of the groove portion 421b so as to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction with a size equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. ..

The guide portion 421a is a groove portion having an arcuate cross-section that is open to the rear side and extends in the vertical direction. By closing the open portion with a rack 452 (see FIG. 22) of the transmission device 450, a guide rod is formed. A tubular portion through which 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted is configured.

The groove portion 421b is a member that forms a sphere passage in cooperation with the second passage forming member 422, and the sphere that flows down along the groove portion 421b is discharged to the rear surface side of the main body member 421 through the discharge opening portion 421c. It

The second passage forming member 422 includes an effect portion 422a formed of a circular liquid crystal, and a shaft support portion 422b that is provided in a cylindrical shape from the disk portion disposed on the back side of the circular liquid crystal to the rear side. A sensor member 422c arranged below the shaft support 422b for detecting passage of a sphere, and a groove opened to the back side with a width allowing the sphere that has passed through the sensor member 422c to flow down in the front-back direction with the groove 421b. A groove portion 422d having the same shape, a guide portion 422e forming a tubular portion into which the guide rod 451 (see FIG. 22) is inserted, and a shape capable of accommodating the connection member 424 between the shaft support portion 422b and the sensor member 422c. And a housing recess 422f that is recessed in.

The shaft support portion 422b is a portion on which the connection member 424 is supported. In a state where the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is arranged at the connecting position, the sphere that has flowed down the left swing unit 500 passes through the sensor member 422c through the connection member 424, and then passes through the passage formed by the groove portions 422d and 421b. To do.

The wiring housing member 423 is a member that accommodates wiring that extends from the lower front member 460 and the like and is connected to the rendering unit 422a and the like, and has a length that is axially supported by the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 when viewed from the front. A main body portion 423a, which is a rod-shaped portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a cylindrical slide shaft 423b that is convexly provided on the rear surface side from the lower end portion of the main body portion 423a are mainly provided.

The main body portion 423a is a member for accommodating wiring in an inner portion formed in a U-shaped cross section, and has a curved shape that is convex in the direction away from the second passage forming member 422 in the longitudinal direction. It Thereby, the wiring can be loosened along the curved shape in the vicinity of the axial support position with the second passage forming member 422, and the wiring can be prevented from being bent and broken.

The slide shaft 423b is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted into the guide hole 462 of the lower front plate member 460.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the configuration of the connecting member 424 will be described. 26A is a front perspective view of the connection member 424, FIG. 26B is a front view of the connection member 424 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIb in FIG. 26A, and FIG. FIG. 27 is a rear view of the connecting member 424 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIc in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the connecting member 424 includes a tubular portion 424a formed in a tubular shape and axially supported by the axial support portion 422b, and extending in the radial direction of the tubular portion 424a. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 424b provided and a curved plate-shaped lower side wall portion 424c arranged to face the upper side wall portion 424b with a length equal to or more than a diameter of a sphere provided below the upper side wall portion 424b in a front view. And a connection cover 424d that connects the rear side end portions of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c and is provided between the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c, and is wound around the cylindrical portion 424a and connected. The member 424 mainly includes a torsion spring 424e that applies downward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25B) biasing force.

The upper side wall portion 424b is formed in such a manner that the width increases as the radial end portion of the tubular portion 424a approaches the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and the side surface is formed along a straight line in FIG. 25(b). It is a plate-shaped part.

The lower side wall portion 424c is a plate-shaped portion that is curved along an arc centered on the axis of the tubular portion 424a, and is spaced apart from the upper side wall portion 424b by a space through which a sphere can pass. It is arranged.

The connection cover 424d is a plate member that suppresses spheres passing through the connection member 424 from spilling to the back side. The open portion of the connecting member 424 formed on the opposite side (front side) of the coupling cover 424d is closed by the bottom portion of the housing recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422 abutting from the front side. This can prevent the sphere from spilling from the opening of the connecting member 424.

The operation of the connecting member 424 with respect to the second passage forming member 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 and 28 are rear views of the second passage forming member 422 and the connecting member 424. Note that FIG. 27 illustrates a downwardly inclined state in which the open portion formed by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 faces the left-right direction. FIG. 28 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41) described later, and FIG. 28 corresponds to a separated state (see FIG. 41) described later, in which the open portion formed by the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c of the member 424 faces obliquely upward. This corresponds to a communication state (see FIG. 42) described later.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the connection member 424 is rotatable about the shaft support portion 422b in a state of being accommodated in the accommodation recess 422f of the second passage forming member 422, and thus the connecting member 424 of the second passage forming member 422 is formed. The front end surfaces of the upper side wall portion 424b and the lower side wall portion 424c are in contact with the bottom of the housing recess 422f.

The accommodating recess 422f is formed in an arc shape centering on the shaft support portion 422b along the outer diameter of the lower side wall portion 424c at a portion opposed to the lower side wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 in the state shown in FIG. The curved wall portion 422f1 and the surface opposed to the curved wall portion 422f1 are recessed in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1 and are smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connection member 424 in the upper inclined state (see FIG. 42). A facing wall portion 422f2 having a curved surface that is formed.

Since the curved wall portion 422f1 abuts the lower wall portion 424c in the radial direction in the downwardly inclined state of the connecting member 424, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the connecting member 424 in the axial radial direction.

Therefore, even if the fitting between the shaft support portion 422b and the tubular portion 424a of the connection member 424 is loosened (a state with a large gap, for example, a state with a gap between 0.5 mm and 1 mm in size), the connection member When 424 is inclined downward, the posture of the connecting member 424 can be maintained with high accuracy by the contact between the lower side wall portion 424c and the curved wall portion 422f1.

On the other hand, when loosely fitting the shaft support portion 422b and the cylindrical portion 424a of the connection member 424, the operation resistance generated in the shaft support portion is reduced, so that the connection is performed unless a load from another member occurs. The member 424 can be reliably maintained in the downwardly inclined state by the action of gravity and the biasing force of the torsion spring 424e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the connection member 424 is maintained in the upper inclined state even when the load from other members is not generated.

The opposing wall portion 422f2 is a portion that guides the sphere from the connection member 424 to the sensor member 422c. In the present embodiment, the surface facing the curved wall portion 422f1 is curved, so that the sphere can be smoothly guided to the sensor member 422c.

The upper tilted state is formed in a communication state in which the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 and the connecting member 424 are in communication. In this state, since the lower side wall portion 424c is separated from the opening of the sensor member 422c, the sphere that rolls and passes through the lower side wall portion 424c of the connection member 424 rolls on the curved wall portion 422f1 to cause the sensor member 422c to move. The groove 422d flows down through the opening.

On the other hand, the downward inclined state is formed in the separated state in which the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 of the left swing unit 500 are separated. In this state, the lower side wall portion 424c projects to the inside of the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the lower end portion of the lower side wall portion 422c and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f arranged to face the lower end portion (the sensor member 422c). From the wall surface extending vertically upward from the diameter of the sphere or less, the sphere is prevented from passing through the connecting member 424 (the sphere is discharged from the lower end).

Therefore, as will be described later, even if the sphere reaches the connecting member 424 in the separated state, the flow of the sphere can be stopped by the connecting member 424.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 33, the lifting operation of the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 will be described. First, the positional relationship between the drive-side slide member 420, the driven-side slide member 430, and the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

29 is a front view of the liquid crystal elevating/lowering unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a side view of the liquid crystal elevating/lowering unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXX in FIG. 29 and 30, a state in which the drive side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 430 are arranged in the lowered position is shown, and the left and right cover members of the cover member 470 are not shown. The transmission member 450 is visible. Further, in FIG. 29, the lowering regulation member 415 and the raising regulation member 417 on the right side in front view are partially enlarged, and the rack immediately before the contact wall 453 and the release convex portion 417c of the raising regulation member 417 contact each other. The outline of 452 is shown in phantom.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, in the driven-side slide member 430, in the lowered position, the fall prevention portion 435 is brought into contact with the locking portion 413 of the base member 410 from below, and the hook-shaped portion 434 rises. The restriction member 417 is abutted from above. In this way, since the driven-side slide member 430 is configured to be restricted from moving in both the vertical direction, it is possible to prevent the driven-side slide member 430 from rattling in the vertical direction at the lowered position.

In addition, since the rising restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are disposed with the guide rod 451 inserted through the guide hole 433 interposed therebetween, and these can be brought into contact with the functional portion 432 of the driven side slide member 430, the function is achieved. It is possible to prevent the portion 432 from rattling in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide rod 451 (the horizontal direction in FIG. 29). Therefore, even if the driven-side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment of being placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven-side slide member 430 may rattle. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Further, since the vertical position of the rising restricting member 417 and the locking portion 413 are displaced from each other, the functional portion 432 rattles in an oblique direction (for example, the direction connecting the locking portion 413 and the rising restricting member 417). Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the driven-side slide member 430 is disturbed at the moment when it is placed in the lowered position or when the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) is hit by the player, the driven-side slide member 430 rattles. Can be suppressed, and the effect of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

It should be noted that since the locking portion 413 is displaced upward as compared with the lift restricting member 417, the locking portion 413 is arranged at a position far from the drive-side slide member 420, and the locking portion 413 is driven-side slide. It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the member 420 from being disturbed. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the drive-side slide member 420 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged in front of the ascending restricting member 417, and the formation height of the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450 (the protruding length from the vicinity of the root of the rack 452). Since the height is just before reaching the lowering regulation member 415, the lowering regulation member 415 and the contact wall 453 do not contact with each other in the rotation direction of the lowering regulation member 415. Further, since the hook-shaped portion 434 is arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction as the rising regulation member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulation member 415 do not contact each other in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the rack 452 includes a projecting plate 453a projecting from the upper end of the abutting wall 453 toward the front side, and the projecting plate 453a can come into contact with the lowering restricting member 415 in the rotation direction.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. Note that, in FIG. 31, the drive side slide member 420 is moved upward from the lowered position and is arranged at the connecting position, and the left and right cover members of the cover member 470 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 31, the downward regulation member 415 and the upward regulation member 417 on the right side in front view are partially enlarged.

In the state where the drive side slide member 420 is arranged at the connecting position, the sphere can be introduced into the connecting member 424 via the left swing unit 500 (see FIG. 42).

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the rising regulating member 417 is a member that covers the hook-shaped portion 434 from the upper side in a state before the upper end portion of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the rising regulating member 417, It is possible to rotate between the engaged state shown in FIG. 29 and the released state shown in FIG. Note that the released state is not limited to the state shown in FIG. 31, and means a state in which the rise regulating member 417 is rotated from a position vertically above the hook-shaped portion 434 to a posture in which the rise regulating member 417 is retracted.

The rising restricting member 417 includes a cylindrical portion 417a axially supported by the second shaft supporting portion 416, an extending plate 417b linearly extending in the tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 417a, and one of the extending plates 417b. A release protrusion 417c vertically protruding from an end (lower end), an engagement protrusion 417d vertically protruding from the other end of the extension plate 417b, and an engagement protrusion thereof. The protrusion 417d extends in the engaged state in parallel with the extending direction of the hook-shaped portion 434 and is arranged inwardly above the tip of the hook-shaped portion 434 (upper left in FIG. 29, enlarged view). The mating claw portion 417e, the separation inclined portion 417f that is inclined downward on the upper side surface of the protruding end portion of the engagement convex portion 417d, and one end portion formed by being wound around the cylindrical portion 417a on the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 417g that biases the rise restricting member 417 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 29) when locked.

The extension plate 417b extends above the axis of the cylindrical portion 417a. Accordingly, when the release projection 417c is pushed up, the other end of the extension plate 417b can be moved in a direction away from the driven-side slide member 430, and the release operation can be performed.

In the engaged state, the engagement claw portion 417e engages with the hook-shaped portion 434 even when the driven-side slide member 430 moves upward (the engagement claw portion 434 between the hook-shaped portion 434 and the functional portion 432). The movement of the driven-side slide member 430 is firmly suppressed by the entry of 417e.

The release operation of the rising restriction member 417 will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the upper end of the contact wall 453 is brought into contact with the release convex portion 417c, while the lift restricting member 417 is maintained in the engaged state. From this state, when the rack 452 is moved up to the state of FIG. 31, the end of the contact wall 453 pushes up the release convex portion 413c, so that the rising restricting member 417 moves in the outer winding direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 31, enlarged view). ), the engaging protrusion 417d is retracted from above the hook-shaped portion 434 (released state).

That is, the lifting operation of the lifting restriction member 417 can be performed only by the lifting operation of the rack 452. Therefore, for example, the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) also serves as a drive device that performs the release operation of the lift restricting member 417, as compared with a case where a solenoid member that performs the release operation of the lift restricting member 417 is separately provided. It is possible to reduce the number of drive devices to be provided (product cost can be reduced). In addition, it is possible to prevent the lift restricting member 417 from being operated carelessly.

In other words, according to the present embodiment, since the lift restricting member 417 is operated according to the arrangement of the rack 452, compared with the case where the lift restricting member 417 is operated by another drive source (solenoid or the like), It is possible to prevent the operation failure between the rack 452 and the lift restricting member 417 from being made inaccurate, and when the driven-side slide member 430 moves up, the lift restricting member 417 is surely shifted to the released state. Can be made. For example, it is possible to prevent the rack 452 from being lifted while the lift restricting member 417 is in the engaged state, and thereby applying an excessive load to the hook-shaped portion 434 and the engaging protrusion 417d of the lift restricting member 417.

Further, the rack 452 is moved up, and the lift restricting member 417 shifts to the released state immediately before the upper end of the rack 452 and the lower end of the driven-side slide member 430 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rack 452 continues to move up. Only when the driven-side slide member 430 and the driving-side slide member 420 are separated from each other, the engaged state (see FIG. 29) is configured to prevent the driven-side slide member 430 from rattling, while the driven-side slide In the state where the member 430 and the driving side slide member 420 are in contact with each other, the released state (see FIG. 31) is configured, and the driving force required to raise the driven side slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Here, in the case where the drive-side slide member 420 pushes up the driven-side slide member 430 during the upward movement of the drive-side slide member 420 as in the present embodiment, the driven-side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are released. Can be performed by pushing up the driven-side slide member 430, but in this case, it is necessary to make the engagement state that can be released by the pushing-up force of the driven-side slide member 430, and firm engagement is difficult. Becomes Further, in this case, there is a problem that the driven-side slide member 430 vibrates due to a reaction generated when the driven-side slide member 430 and the engaging portion are disengaged and the posture becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lift restricting member 417 is rotated to retract the lift restricting member 417 from above the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 430, the engagement is released in the engaged state. The force that can be applied to the driven-side slide member 430 and the force that rotates the lift restricting member 417 can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the force for suppressing the upward movement of the driven-side slide member 430 in the engaged state while suppressing the force required for releasing.

In addition, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 do not come into contact with each other when the lifting restricting member 417 is released, the driven-side slide member 430 is less likely to recoil, and the driven-side slide member 430 at the time of release. The posture can be stabilized.

Note that, in the connected state shown in FIG. 31, the discharge opening 421c of the drive-side slide member 420 and the tubular passage portion 463 of the lower front plate member 460 communicate with each other. As a result, the sphere that has flowed down the second passage forming member 422 can be discharged to the tubular passage portion 463.

32 and 33 are front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 31, and the projecting plate 453a of the transmission device 450 is in contact with the lowering regulation member 415. FIG. 32 shows the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 32, and the projecting plate 453a is located at the raised position where it rides above the lowering regulation member 415. Further, in FIG. 33, the vicinity of the lowering regulation member 415 is partially enlarged.

In the state illustrated in FIG. 32, the release protrusion 417c of the lift restricting member 417 is brought into contact with the contact wall 453 of the transmission device 450. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission devices 450 are arranged symmetrically, and the direction in which the release projection 417c contacts the contact wall 453 is also symmetrical. Therefore, the release projection 417c functions as a guide for guiding the drive-side slide member 420, and it is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from rattling in the left-right direction during the up-and-down operation.

Since the lift restricting member 417 is biased in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 by the torsion spring 417g, a load in the left-right inward direction of the liquid crystal elevating unit 400 is applied to the contact wall 453 from the release projection 417c. Can be applied. As a result, the drive-side slide member 420 is urged in a constant direction along the left-right direction, so that the posture of the drive-side slide member 420 during the lifting operation can be stabilized.

Further, when the drive-side slide member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction, the elastic force applied from the release projection 417c to the contact wall 453 causes the drive-side slide member 420 to return to the center position in a pair of left and right. The rise restricting member 417 is asymmetrical to the left and right.

That is, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves in the direction approaching the release convex portion 417c, the rise restricting member 417 is further rotated to the release side, so that the deformation amount of the torsion spring 417g increases and the biasing force increases. While the force that pushes back the contact wall 453 increases, on the side where the contact wall 453 moves away from the release projection 417c, the lift restricting member 417 is rotated in the direction opposite to the release side, so that the torsion spring 417g. Deformation amount is reduced, the urging force is reduced, and the force for pushing the contact wall 453 is reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress rattling in the left-right direction when the driving-side slide member 420 is moved up and down.

Since the drive gear 442 and the lift restricting member 417 are arranged on the same side with respect to the rack 452, the biasing force of the torsion spring 417g acts in the direction of separating the rack 452 from the drive gear 442, so that the drive-side slide member 420 moves. It is possible to prevent the rack 452 from rattling in the left-right direction and the drive gear 442 coming close to each other, and the drive resistance from increasing (the spacing between the tooth flanks of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 can be stabilized).

That is, when the drive-side slide member 420 rattles in the left-right direction and moves in the direction in which the rack 452 approaches the drive gear 442, the lift restricting member 417 is wound outside (the engagement protrusions 417d are the left and right outer sides of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400). When the rack 452 is driven, the amount of deformation of the torsion spring 417g increases, and the biasing force increases to increase the biasing force that pushes back the drive-side slide member 420. When moving in the direction away from the gear 442, the guide rod 451 supports the rack 452, so that the rack 452 moves away from the drive gear 442 more than the gap provided in the support structure between the guide rod 451 and the rack 452. Is regulated. As a result, the gap between the tooth flanks of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 can be reduced, and the tooth resistance of the rack 452 and the drive gear 422 can be prevented from becoming excessive. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, in a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are arranged in the raised position, the lower surface of the projecting plate 453 a of the transmission device 450 has the release projecting portion 415 c of the down-regulating member 415. Abut on the upper side (locked state).

The projecting plate 453a includes an inclined side surface 453a1 on the lower side surface that is inclined upward toward the left and right sides.

The descending inclination member 415 includes a cylindrical portion 415a axially supported by the first shaft supporting portion 414, an extending plate 415b linearly extended in a tangential direction of the cylindrical portion 415a, and one of the extending plates 415b. A release protrusion 415c vertically protruding from the end (upper end) and having a semicircular tip, and one end of the release protrusion 415c wound around the cylindrical portion 415a are connected to the main body member 411 of the base member 410. It mainly includes a torsion spring 415d that, when stopped, biases the lowering restricting member 415 in the inward winding direction (counterclockwise direction in the enlarged view of FIG. 33).

As shown in FIG. 33, the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 is locked by the lowering regulation member 415. Therefore, the supply of the driving force of the drive motor 441 (see FIG. 22) can be stopped while the rack 452 is held at the raised position, and the power consumption of the drive motor 441 can be reduced.

Further, the rotation operation of the descending restriction member 415 to the locked state shown in FIG. 33 is performed by the rack 452 being moved up and the projecting plate 453a overcoming the release projection 415c of the descending restriction member 415. Therefore, both the driving force for raising the rack 452 and the driving force for forming the locked state of the lowering regulation member 415 can be generated by the driving motor 441 (see FIG. 2). That is, the drive motor 441 can also be used, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Returning to FIG. 30, the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the descending regulation member 415, the elevation regulation member 417, and the contact wall 453 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the lowering restricting member 415 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 30) as compared with the ascending restricting member 417, and the contact wall 453 can contact the ascending restricting member 417 in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The lower side surface of the lowering restricting member 415 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the contact wall 453.

It returns to FIG. 33 and demonstrates. The descending regulation member 415 and the contact wall 453 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 33, the abutment wall 453 and the ascending regulation member 417 are abutted in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 33), and the abutment wall 453 and the descending regulation member 415 are in the front-rear direction (the surface of FIG. 33). Abut in the vertical direction). As a result, the upward regulation member 417 can suppress rattling of the drive-side slide member 420 in the left-right direction, and the downward regulation member 415 can prevent the forward-backward direction (the direction parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442). It is possible to suppress wobbling.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the area of the meshing surface due to the relative movement of the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 in the direction parallel to the tooth surface, and to tilt forward in the state where the rack 452 is arranged in the raised position. Can be prevented.

From the state shown in FIG. 33, when the rack 452 starts to descend by rotating the drive gear 442 in the direction of lowering the rack 452, the projecting plate 453a applies a load to the release projecting portion 415c, whereby the descending regulation member. 415 is rotated outward (clockwise in the enlarged view of FIG. 33). As a result, the locking by the lowering regulation member 415 is released, and the driving side slide member 420 can be moved downward. That is, since the locking by the lowering regulation member 415 can be released by the driving force of the drive motor 441 (the driving source can also be used), the product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the lowering restricting member 415 is unlocked by the lowering operation of the drive-side slide member 420, the lowering of the lowering restricting member is caused due to a shift in the operation timing as in the case of rotating the lowering restricting member 415 by another drive source. It is possible to prevent the drive-side slide member 420 from being lowered before the restriction of the member 415 is released, and to prevent an overload from being generated in the drive source and the downward restriction member 415.

In addition, in the structure in which both the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 are maintained in the raised position in the raised position as in the present embodiment, the locking of each member in the raised position is locked by the driven-side slide member 430. However, in this case, the structure for connecting and disconnecting the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 becomes complicated and the cost increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driven-side slide member 430 is retained to maintain the driven-side slide member 430 in the raised position, so that the driven-side slide member 430 and the drive-side slide member 420 are maintained in the raised position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the configuration required (only the drive device 450 and the drive side slide member 420). Further, since the driven-side slide member 430 and the driving-side slide member 420 are interlocked with each other, the structure between the driven-side slide member 430 and the driving-side slide member 420 can be simplified by exclusively using the action of gravity. it can.

When the rack 452 is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 33, the driven-side slide member 430 moves down on the rack 452, but the guide rod 451 and the guide hole 433 (for example, see FIG. 22) when the guide rod 451 becomes dirty. If there is a large resistance between (1) and (4), the descending speed of the driven-side slide member 430 may be lower than the descending speed of the rack 452. Even in this case, when the driven-side slide member 430 comes into contact with the lift restricting member 417, the hook-shaped portion 434 acts on the separated inclined portion 417f of the lift restricting member 417, so that the lift restricting member 417 can be rotated. By the self-weight of the driven-side slide member 430, the lift restricting member 417 and the hook-shaped portion 434 can be engaged with each other.

Next, the left swing unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 42. FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the game board 13 and the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 34, the left swing unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port 82 of the game board 13, and the balls won in the second specific winning port 82 are displayed. A flow passage is provided on the inside. In the present embodiment, a sensor member 82b that detects that a ball has passed is disposed between the second variable winning device 82a and the second specific winning port 82. The sensor member 82b is a part of the various switches 208 (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIG. 35, the left swing unit 500 is a unit configured to hang the first passage forming member 520 in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, and is a unit that produces an effect by swinging the first passage forming member 520. is there.

FIG. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 500, and FIG. 37 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left swing unit 500. As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the left swing unit 500 includes a base member 510 forming a skeleton, a first passage forming member 520 pivotally supported by the base member 510, and a base. A driving device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the member 510 to generate the driving force of the first passage forming member 520, a transmission device 540 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 530 to the first passage forming member 520, and a front cover And a cover member 550 that has an introduction cylindrical portion 552 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and that is connected to the second specific winning opening 82 of the game board 13.

The base member 510 includes a main body member 511 formed of a plate-shaped body having an L-shape in front view, a shaft support hole 512 formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at a right end portion of the main body view in front view, and a shaft support thereof. A first wall portion 513, which is arranged vertically above the hole 512 and has a plane plate shape with its surface facing in the front-rear direction, and one or more spheres from the lower left end portion of the first wall portion 513 to the left side in front view. The second wall portion 514 which is arranged with a space between and is formed in the shape of a curved plate whose surface is oriented in the left-right direction, and the sphere which is arranged on the back side of the second wall portion 514 and reaches the second wall portion 514. The downflow passage 515 that flows down, the shaft support portion 516 that is provided to the lower left of the shaft support hole 512 in a front view and is provided in a cylindrical shape on the front side, and the locking provided around the axis of the shaft support portion 516. A wall portion 517 and a detection sensor 518 arranged above the shaft support portion 516 for detecting the phase of the transmission device are mainly provided.

The shaft support hole 512 is a hole through which the shaft support 521c of the first passage forming member 520 is inserted, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung about the shaft supporting hole 512.

The first wall portion 513 includes a pair of guide wall portions 513a extending from both end portions in the left-right direction toward the front side.

The locking wall portion 517 includes an arc wall portion 517a having an arc shape centering on the shaft support portion 516 above the shaft support portion 516, and an inclined wall portion 517b extending downward to the right in front view. ..

The arcuate wall portion 517a is an end surface of the detection sensor 518 and extends to the circumferential end surface of the shaft support portion 516.

The first passage forming member 520 is a long rod-shaped distribution base member 521 that is a member that is axially supported by the shaft support hole 512, and is arranged on the front side of the distribution base member 521 to the distribution base member 521. A passage cover member 522 which is fastened and fixed and which forms a passage through which the sphere can flow down between the distribution base member 521 and the distribution base member 521.

The distribution base member 521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 521a that constitutes one side of a ball flow passage, and one ball along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 521a from the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a. The intermediate plate portion 521b arranged at a position separated by a gap V1 and a shaft support portion 521c which is formed in a cylindrical shape on the back side near the upper end of the hanging plate portion 521a and which is inserted into the shaft support hole 512. And a long hole 521d formed in a plate-shaped portion extending in the radial direction of the shaft supporting portion 521c along the extending direction, and a rear side from an end portion of the intermediate plate portion 521b on the hanging plate portion 521a side. And a distribution convex portion 521e configured to have a width reduced toward the radially outer side of the shaft support portion 521c, and a gap V1 along the left side surface of the distribution convex portion 521e when viewed from the rear side. A curved wall portion 521f that extends toward the front side and that curves along an arc shape having a center at the upper end portion of the hanging plate portion 521a is mainly provided.

The hanging plate portion 521a is configured to have a shape in which the lower side from the middle portion is bent downward as compared to the upper side from the middle portion, and the lower end portion has a thickness portion on the front side shaved to be thinned into a ball feeding portion. 521a1.

The gap V1 is a space that allows the sphere that has reached the right side of the distribution convex portion 521e in front view to pass in the front direction.

The passage cover member 522 is a plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 522a that is provided on the front side of the distribution base member 521, and a plate-shaped portion that extends from both ends in the lateral direction of the plate-shaped portion 522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 522b are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 522a is formed of a light transmissive resin material, and has a lower end portion formed with a ball receiving portion 522a1 that is bent to the back side in a portion arranged on the front side of the ball feeding portion 521a1 of the distribution base member 521. Prepare

The upper and lower wall portions 522b are portions for rolling the sphere that has passed through the gap V1, and since the inclination angle changes at the intermediate portion as a boundary like the hanging plate portion 521a, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed at the intermediate portion. it can.

A step is provided inside the tip portion of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b. The step has a role of displacing the rolling sphere in the opposing direction of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (direction from one wall portion to the other wall portion) to decelerate the sphere.

The velocity of the ball that has reached the lower end of the first passage forming member 520 is directed to the back side by the ball sending portion 521a1 and the ball receiving portion 522a1. As a result, the speed of the ball before discharging can be reduced, and the discharging of the ball can be stabilized.

The drive device 530 includes a drive motor 531 and a drive gear 532 that is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531. The drive gear 532 is meshed with the main body gear portion 541 of the transmission device 540.

The transmission device 540 includes a main body gear portion 541 which is axially supported by the shaft support portion 516 and meshes with the drive gear 532, and a first passage forming member which is provided in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the eccentric position of the main body gear portion 541 to the front side. The eccentric convex portion 542 that is inserted into the elongated hole 521d of the 520 and the main body gear portion 541 are configured to extend in the radial direction so as to be able to contact the locking wall portion 517 and to be able to pass through the gap of the detection sensor 518. And an extended portion 543 that is mainly provided.

The cover member 550 is connected to the second specific winning port 82 at the front end on the right side of the plate member main body 551 which is covered by the base member 510, and the rear end is the first end. A cylindrical introduction cylindrical portion 552 that abuts the wall portion 513, and a pair of guide wall portions 553 that extend downward from the left and right ends of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 on the rear side surface of the main body member 551. Prepare mainly.

The guide wall portion 553 is a portion that overlaps with the guide wall portion 513a of the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The sphere that has passed through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 flows downward between the guide wall portions 513a and 553.

The swinging operation of the first passage forming member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. 38 to 40 are front views of the swing motion unit 500. 38 to 40, the illustration of the cover member 550 is omitted, and the outer shape of the first passage forming member 520 is shown in a cross-sectional view at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member 520 is shown. The outline shape is shown in phantom.

Further, in FIG. 38, the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position is shown in FIG. 39(a), and the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. In the state in which the minute convex portion 521e is arranged at the intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a, in FIG. 39(b), the first passage forming member 520 swings by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 39(a). The state immediately before the contact with the connecting member 424 is shown in FIG. 40, and the state in which the first passage forming member 520 is swung by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. It

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the swing motion of the first passage forming member 520 is caused by the transmission device 540 being rotated and the position of the elongated hole 521d being moved as the eccentric convex portion 542 is moved.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the released position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric projection 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect perpendicularly. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the first passage forming member 520 starting to rotate is directed toward the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the generation of the load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

Further, in the release position, the extended portion 543 of the transmission device 540 is disposed in the gap of the detection sensor 518 and abuts on the end of the arc wall portion 517a. That is, the extending portion 543 has both a role as a portion used for detecting the phase of the transmission device 540 and a role as a rotation stopping member.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the release position, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged to face the guide wall portion 513a on the right side of the base member 510 in front view. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the left side in front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and discharged to the outside of the game area through the flow-down passage 515. To be done.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged at the intermediate position between the pair of guide wall portions 513a of the base member 510 at the intermediate position between the release position and the connection position. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the first wall portion 513 and passed between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (remains on the tip of the distribution convex portion 521e while remaining on the tip portion of the distribution convex portion 521e). ).

As shown in FIG. 39B, in a state immediately before the first passage forming member 520 abuts on the connecting member 424, the distribution convex portion 521 e is arranged between the pair of guide wall portions 513 a of the base member 510. Therefore, the sphere reaching the first wall portion 513 and passing between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is stopped from flowing down by the distribution convex portion 521e (while remaining on the tip end of the distribution convex portion 521e, stay). This prevents the sphere from passing through the first passage forming member 520 and being sent to the connecting member 424 in the state of FIG. 39(b) and reaching the opposing wall portion 422f2.

Here, since the facing wall portion 422f2 is smoothly connected to the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 in the upper inclined state (see FIG. 42), the upper end portion has the upper end portion in the connecting member 424 in the lower inclined state (see FIG. 41). It is configured to project from the lower end of the upper side wall 424b to the left in the front view. Therefore, when the sphere is fed to the connecting member 424 in the downward inclined state and the sphere collides with the upper end portion of the facing wall portion 422f2, the facing wall portion 422f2 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39(b), since the ball is prevented from being introduced into the first passage forming member 520, it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the facing wall portion 422f2. It is possible to prevent the opposing wall portion 422f2 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the connecting position, the direction X1 connecting the shaft support 516 and the eccentric projection 542 and the direction X2 coinciding with the extending direction of the elongated hole 521d (the radial direction of the shaft support 521c) intersect vertically. To do. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric convex portion 542 by the first passage forming member 520 starting to rotate is directed toward the shaft support portion 516, it is possible to suppress the generation of the load that rotates the transmission device 540. Accordingly, the posture of the transmission device 540 can be maintained without continuously applying the driving force to the drive gear 532, and the power consumption of the drive motor 531 (see FIG. 36) can be reduced.

In addition, in the connecting position, the extending portion 543 of the transmission device 540 abuts against the inclined wall portion 517b. Accordingly, the extension portion 543 is abutted against the inclined wall portion 517b to stabilize the phase of stopping the transmission device 540, and the extension portion 543 is compared with the case where a load is locally applied. The durability of 543 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 40, in the connected state, the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged so as to face the guide wall portion 513a on the left side of the base member 510 in a front view. Therefore, the sphere that reaches the first wall portion 513 and passes between the guide wall portions 513a and 553 is distributed to the path on the right side in front view by the distribution convex portion 521e, and moves to the front surface side through the gap V1. From the passage cover member 522 rolls along the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 522b (see FIG. 37).

The flow of the balls in the connected state will be described. First, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 82 from the game area through the second variable winning device 82a moves back and forth toward the back side through the introduction cylindrical portion 552 (see FIG. 36), and the first wall portion. When it comes into contact with 513, it flows down the passage formed by the guide wall portions 513a and 553, moves back and forth through the gap V1 of the first passage forming member 520 toward the front side, and the upper and lower wall portions of the passage cover member 522. Roll over the lower wall of 522b.

That is, the sphere is sent in the front-rear direction before the sphere flows down inside the first passage forming member 520. Therefore, even if the balls are supplied to the second specific winning opening 82 in a daisy chain, the balls can be smoothly flowed into the first passage forming member 520 while suppressing the bouncing of the balls. Further, the direction of the velocity of the sphere can be changed by causing the sphere sent in the front-rear direction to flow down along the curved wall portion 521f (see FIG. 37), and the sphere smoothly flows into the first passage forming member 520. Can be made.

In the first passage forming member 520, the extending direction of the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 changes with the middle portion as a boundary. That is, the distribution base member 521 and the passage cover member 522 extend along the straight line Y1 from the intermediate portion to the base end side (the shaft support portion 521c side), and from the intermediate portion to the tip end side (opposite to the base end side). Are extended along a straight line Y2 inclined downward from the straight line Y1.

Therefore, the velocity of the sphere rolling inside the first passage forming member 520 is slower until it reaches the intermediate portion from the base end side than when it reaches the distal end portion from the intermediate portion. Become. Therefore, the player can easily see the ball immediately after the ball is introduced into the first passage forming member 520.

Further, as compared with the case where the first passage forming member 520 is formed in a straight shape along the straight line Y1, the direction in which the sphere is fed from the first passage forming member 520 at the connecting position (see FIG. 42) is The angle with the direction (vertical direction) in which the sphere is introduced into the sensor member 422c can be reduced. This makes it possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the first passage forming member 520 is swung by the rotation of the transmission device 540, and the path along which the sphere flows down is switched by the arrangement of the distribution convex portion 521e.

Here, when a wall member that is arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e is arranged, the distribution convex portion 521e is brought closer to the wall member to the diameter of the sphere or less. If the configuration is adopted, when the sphere stays in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e, the sphere may be caught between the distribution convex portion 521e and the wall member, and malfunction may occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connecting position shown in FIG. 40, a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere is provided between the distribution convex portion 521e and the second wall portion 514, and the distribution convex portion is formed. The wall member is not arranged on the opposite side of the second wall portion 514 with the 521e interposed therebetween and is opened. Therefore, a situation in which the ball is caught in the rotation direction of the distribution convex portion 521e does not occur, and a malfunction can be prevented.

With reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, a flow path connection between the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500 will be described. 41 and 42 are partial front views of the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 and the left swing unit 500. 41 and 42, the second passage forming member 422 is cross-sectionally viewed and the connecting member 424 is visible, and the first passage forming member 520 has an outer shape at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the hanging plate portion 521a. The distribution convex portion 521e shown in the figure is visible.

41 and 42 show a state in which the liquid crystal lifting unit 400 is arranged at the connection position (see FIG. 31), and in FIG. 41, the left swing unit 500 is arranged at the release position (see FIG. 38). 42 is illustrated, and in FIG. 42, the left swing unit 500 is illustrated in the connection position (see FIG. 40).

When the first passage forming member 520 is oscillated from the state shown in FIG. 41 to the state shown in FIG. 42, the tip portion of the first passage forming member 520 abuts the lower side surface of the upper wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424, and the connecting member 424 is removed. Rock. That is, since the connecting member 424 is moved along with the moving direction of the first passage forming member 520, for example, even when the stop position of the driving side slide member 420 is slightly deviated from the ideal position, It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the tip of the passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling between the tip of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424, and stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage forming member 520 to the second passage forming member 422. You can

By swinging the connection member 424, the lower side wall portion 424c on which the sphere that has flowed down from the first passage forming member 520 rolls is moved in the direction approaching the tip of the first passage forming member 520. The gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424 can be narrowed, and the balls are prevented from falling from the gap between the rolling surfaces of the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball delivery.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, the lower side wall portion 424c is inclined downward toward the sensor member 422c communicating with the groove portion 422d (see FIG. 27). Thereby, the ball can be rolled along the descending inclination, and the ball can be stably fed to the second passage forming member 422.

The swinging motion of the first passage forming member 520 is performed by detecting passage of the sensor member 82b (see FIG. 34) or the sensor member 422c through a sphere. For example, in the state where the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the connecting position shown in FIG. 42, the detected numbers of spheres of the sensor member 82b and the sensor member 422c match (the sphere remains on the first passage forming member 520). It is possible to prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area by swinging the first passage forming member 520 toward the release position (see FIG. 41) at a timing not can do.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the balls are distributed by the movement of the distribution protrusions 521e, and the first passage forming member 520 is swung to contact the first passage forming member 520 and the connecting member 424. The driving force necessary for the operation of contacting and forming the downward path of the sphere is shared (the driving force of the driving motor 531 (see FIG. 36) for operating the first passage forming member 520 is used). Since the states are synchronized, for example, it is possible to avoid the situation where the sphere is introduced into the first passage forming member 520 when the first passage forming member 520 is arranged at the release position. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from being discharged from the tip of the first passage forming member 520 to the outside of the game area.

In addition, the distribution convex portion 521e is disposed on the upper end portion of the distribution base member 521, and defines a passage of a ball flowing down the front side of the hanging plate portion 521a (see FIG. 36) (forming an upper end). Doubles as As a result, it is possible to reduce the component cost as compared with the case where the other components are distributed, and the spheres distributed to the first passage forming member 520 side are surely attached to the hanging plate portion 521a and the passage cover member. It can be introduced into the passage between 522 and 522.

Next, the rotation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 77. 43 is a front view of the rotation unit 600, and FIG. 44 is a front perspective view of the rotation unit 600. FIG. 45 is a front view of the rotary unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed, and FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the rotary unit 600 with the guide member 680 removed. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 600, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 48, the rotating unit 600 includes a case member 610 formed in a container shape with one surface side open, a guide member 620 covered on one surface side of the case member 610, and those cases. A driving mechanism 630 arranged between the member 610 and the guide member 620 facing each other, a rotating member 640 rotatably driven by the driving force of the driving mechanism 630, and a pitching ball arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. A device 650 and a guide member 680 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 are mainly provided.

The case member 610 includes a bottom wall portion 611 that is substantially circular in a front view, and a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 612 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 611 toward the front, and one surface is formed by these wall portions 611 and 612. It is shaped like a container with an open side. The guide member 620 is formed in a disk shape having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged (fixed) at the leading end of the outer wall portion 612 of the case member 610. As a result, an internal space is formed between the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610 and the guide member 620, and the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the internal space.

The guide member 620 is a member for holding the rotating member 640 so as to be displaceable, and a connecting link acting groove 621 and an undulating link acting groove 622 are provided in the front surface of the guide member 620. The connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section that are extended along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the connection link member 644 and the undulation link of the rotation member 640, which will be described later. The insertion portions 644a and 648a of the member 648 are inserted respectively.

The groove widths of the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 are set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameters of the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connection link member 644 and the undulation link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portions 644a and 648a of the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 can be slid (guided) along the extending direction of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622.

When the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the connecting link action groove 621 acts on the connecting link member 644 to increase or decrease the interval between the division members DV (see FIG. 73 ), while the undulating link action groove 622 is It acts on the undulating link member 648 to undulate the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 (see FIGS. 59 and 60). Here, the connection link action groove 621 and the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

49 is a front view of the rotary unit 600 in a state in which the rotary member 640, a part of the pitching device 650 and the guide member 680 are removed, and FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of the guide member 620. Note that, in FIG. 50, the shapes of the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line. The two-dot chain line is illustrated as a line passing through the center of the groove width of each of the action grooves 621 and 622.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the connecting link action groove 621 has a large-diameter portion 621a that is curved in an arc shape with a radius R1 around the axis O, and an arc with a radius R2 that is centered around the axis O. And a pair of connecting portions 621c connecting the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b. The radius R1 of the large diameter portion 621a is set to be larger than the radius R2 of the small diameter portion 621b (R2<R1).

The undulating link action groove 622 has a large diameter portion 622a which is curved in an arc shape with a radius R3 about the axis O, a small diameter portion 622b which is curved with an radius R4 about the axis O as a center, and these large diameter portions. 622a and a small diameter portion 622b, and a pair of connecting portions 622c. The radius R3 of the large diameter portion 622a is set to be larger than the radius R4 of the small diameter portion 622b (R4<R3).

In the present embodiment, the large diameter portion 621a and the small diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 and the large diameter portion 622a and the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged concentrically around the axis O. In this case, the axis O is aligned with the center of rotation when the rotating member 640 is rotated. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotated, it acts on the connecting link member 644 and the undulating link member 648 from the large diameter portions 621a and 622a and the small diameter portions 622a and 622b of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the undulating link acting groove 622, respectively. By suppressing the force, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Further, the pair of connecting portions 621c of the connecting link action groove 621 are arranged at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees. Similarly, the pair of connecting portions 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 are arranged at positions where their phases are different by 180 degrees. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is rotationally driven, the force applied from one connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 to the connecting link member 644 and the force acting from the other connecting portion 621c to the connecting link member 644. And can be offset. Similarly, it is possible to cancel the force applied from the one connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 to the undulating link member 648 and the force acting from the other connecting portion 622c to the undulating link member 648. As a result, the force applied to the rotating member 640 can be made uniform as a whole, so that the rotation of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced. ..

In the present embodiment, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed to have different phases. That is, in the state where the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621, the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622a of the undulation link action groove 622. When the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is inserted through either one of the portions 622b and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622, the insertion portion 644a of the connecting link member 644 is The action groove 621 is inserted into either the large diameter portion 621a or the small diameter portion 621b.

Since the connection portions 621c and 622c are portions for changing the distance between the division members DV or for displacing the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647, where the connection portions 621c and 622c receive a relatively large reaction force, By preventing the 644a and 648a from being inserted into the connecting portions 621c and 622c at the same time, the necessary driving force can be dispersed. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48, the drive mechanism 630 will be described. The drive mechanism 630 is a mechanism for rotationally driving the rotating member 640, and includes a drive motor 631, a pinion gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631, and a head gear (first transmission gear) of the pinion gear 632. A central transmission body 634 having a transmission gear train to which 633a) is meshed, a gear 634a meshed to the last gear (second transmission gear 633b) of the transmission gear train, and a gear 634a of the central transmission member 634. The first gear (first distribution gears 635a, 636a) meshes with the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side distribution gear train, and the end gears of the one-side distribution gear train and the other-side gear train (third distribution gear train). The one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 having gears 637a and 638a meshed with the gears 635c and 636c) are mainly provided. The second distribution gears 635b and 636b are interposed between the first distribution gears 635a and 636a and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c, respectively.

The one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are members that are the end (output end of the drive mechanism 630) of the transmission path that transmits the rotation drive force generated from the drive motor 631. The rotation driving force rotates itself, and the rotation causes the rotation member 640 to rotate. Here, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51A is a front view of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation member 638, and FIG. 51B is the one-side rotation member 637 and the other along the LIb-LIb line of FIG. 51A. It is a sectional view of a side rotation member 638.

Since the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are members formed in the same shape, only the one-side rotation driving member 637 will be described, and the other-side rotation driving member 638 will be described. Only the reference numerals are given in the drawing of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47, the one-side rotation drive member 637 is formed in a disc shape, and the engaging portions 637b are recessed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) at equal circumferential intervals of the outer edge portion thereof. It is formed.

The engaging portion 637b is a portion that engages with the engaged portion 641 (see FIG. 56) of the split member DV of the rotating member 640, and the width (the distance between the facing surfaces is increased from the open side toward the recessed inner side). ) Is narrowed, it is formed in a substantially V shape in a front view (view in the axial direction). As will be described later, by rotating the one-sided rotation driving member 637, the rotation is transmitted to the rotating member 640 via the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 to rotate the rotating member 640. It can be rotated.

The one side rotation driving member 637 is formed with a connecting wall 637c that partially connects the inner surfaces of the engaging portion 637b that face each other. The connection wall 637c is formed in a shape that is curved in an arc shape in a front view (viewed in the axial direction) about the axis of the one-side rotation driving member 637, and is open to the engagement portion 637b (one-side rotation driving member 637). Only the inner surfaces on the outer edge side) are connected, and the inner surfaces on the inner side of the recessed portion of the engaging portion 637b are not connected.

Here, when the rotating member 640 is driven by the one-side rotation driving member 637, engagement and disengagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 are intermittently repeated (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 starts to engage with the engaging portion 637b, an impact load may be input and the one-side rotation driving member 637 may be damaged. On the other hand, when the weight of the one-sided rotation driving member 637 increases, a large output is required for the driving motor 631 of the driving mechanism 630.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the connecting wall 637c is formed only on the open side of the engaging portion 637b, the reinforcement against the impact load when the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641 start engaging with each other. It is possible to effectively achieve both the weight reduction and the weight reduction. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced while improving the durability of the one-side drive member 637.

It returns to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48 and demonstrates. Each component of the drive mechanism 630 is disposed in the case member 610 except for the central transmission member 634 (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, the central transmission member 634 is rotatably held on the back side of the guide member 620. Here, the structure for holding the central transmission member 634 on the guide member 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 600 taken along a plane including the rotation axis of the central transmission member 634. As shown in FIG. 52, the central transmission member 634 is formed in a hat shape having a circular shape in a front view and having a depressed central portion, and a gear 634a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the depressed portion at the center and the outermost edge. A protruding portion 634b is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction from the portion in a flange shape.

On the back side of the guide member 620, a pair of holding collars 623 and 624 (see FIG. 47 and FIG. 48) are superposed on each other at three places (that is, positions at 120 degree intervals) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. The projecting portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 is slidably inserted between the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 that are disposed. Accordingly, the central transmission member 634 can be rotatably held by the guide member 620 via the pair of holding collars 623 and 624.

That is, the displacement of the central transmission member 634 in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 52) with respect to the guide member 620 can be restricted by bringing the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634. The axial displacement of the central transmission member 634 with respect to the guide member 620 (horizontal direction in FIG. 52) is restricted by bringing the overhanging portion 634b of the central transmission member 634 into contact with the facing surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624. it can.

In this case, the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 are formed in a circular shape in a front view (view in the rotation axis direction of the central transmission member 634). Therefore, the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of holding collars 623 and 624 and the outer peripheral surface of the central transmission member 634 can be in a relationship in which the arc shapes circumscribe (i.e., make point contact) with each other, and the contact area between them is small. Then, the frictional resistance when the central transmission member 634 rotates can be reduced. As a result, the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Further, by adopting such a structure that the outer edge side (protruding portion 634b) of the central transmission member 634 is held, the central recessed portion of the central transmission member 634 is axially attached to the bottom wall portion 611 of the case member 610. Since there is no need to support it and a space for arranging the parts for the shaft support becomes unnecessary, a space for arranging a pitching device 650 described later can be secured by that much.

Next, the operation of drive mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a front view of the case member 610 and the drive mechanism 630, and illustrates a state in which the central transmission member 634 is cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the drive mechanism 630, the central transmission member 634 is arranged at a position concentric with the axis O which is the rotation center of the rotation member 640, and the second transmission is performed to the gear 634 a of the central transmission member 634. The gear 633b and the third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged in mesh with each other. The third distribution gears 635c and 636c are arranged at positions 180 degrees out of phase (that is, at positions facing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween).

Therefore, when the drive motor 631 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the second transmission gear 633b via the pinion gear 632 and the first transmission gear 633a, and the central portion is transmitted along with the rotation of the second transmission gear 633b. The transmission member 634 is rotated.

When the central transmission member 634 is rotated, the pair of first distribution gears 635a and 636a are respectively rotated along with the rotation of the central transmission member 634, and the rotation thereof is the second distribution gears 635b and 636b and the third distribution gear 635b and 636b. It is transmitted to the gears 637a and 638a (see FIG. 48) of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 via the gears 635c and 636c, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 rotate. To be done.

As described above, since the central transmission gear 634 is meshed with the first distribution gear 635a and the second distribution gear 636a, the central transmission gear 634 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 631, so that the one-side rotation drive member is rotated. The 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 can be rotated in a synchronized state. As a result, driving of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

In this case, since the central transmission gear 634 is arranged concentrically with the axis O of the rotating member 640, the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and the other-side rotation driving members 637, 638 are viewed in the direction of the axis O. In, in the rotary member 640, the rotary member 640 can be disposed inward (on the axial center O direction side) of the outer edge portion. That is, since the central transmission gear 634 and the one-side and the other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are not projected outward from the outer shape of the rotating member 640, the size can be reduced accordingly.

In the state where the guide member 620 is disposed on the case member 610, the engaging portions 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 are arranged radially outward of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. 638b is exposed (see FIG. 49), and the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV of the rotating member 640 can be engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b. Therefore, by rotating the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation member 640 through the engagement of the engaging portions 637b and 638b and the engaged portion 641. Thus, the rotating member 640 can be rotated.

In this case, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees (that is, positions facing each other with the axis O interposed therebetween). Therefore, as will be described later, it is possible to stabilize the rotation of the rotating member 640 by maximally separating the position (engaging position) where the driving force is applied to the rotating member 640.

Further, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged in postures (rotational positions) in which the phases of the engaging portions 637b and the engaging portions 638b are different from each other. That is, when one of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b is disengaged from the engaged portion 641, the other of the engaging portion 637b and the engaging portion 638b engages with the engaged portion 641. (One side and the other side are prevented from being disengaged at the same time). Therefore, as will be described later, intermittent transmission of the driving force from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the rotation member 640 can be suppressed, and the rotation of the rotation member 640 can be stabilized.

It returns to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48 and demonstrates. As described above, the rotating member 640 is a member having an annular shape in a front view, which is rotated by receiving the driving force of the rotating mechanism 630, and has a posture concentric with the central transmission member 634 and the guiding member 620, and the guiding member 620. Is arranged on the front side of. In addition, in this embodiment, the rotating member 640 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view. Here, the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60.

54(a) is a front view of the rotating member 640, and FIG. 54(b) is a side view of the rotating member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 54(a). Further, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the rotating member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LV in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the rotating member 640 includes a plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) dividing members DV, and the plurality of dividing members DV are connected to each other in an endless manner along the circumferential direction. By doing so, it is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front.

In this case, the plurality of division members DV are formed so that the interval between the adjacent division members DV can be changed. That is, in the rotating member 640, the first section S1 in which the division members DV are connected to each other in the circumferential direction at the first interval and the second section in which the division members DV are made narrower than the first interval. And a second section S2 connected in the circumferential direction is formed. In addition, between the first section S1 and the second section S2, the interval between the division members DV transits from the first interval in the first section S1 to the second interval in the second section S2 (or vice versa). A section is formed.

FIG. 56(a) is a front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 56(b) is a rear perspective view of the division member DV. Further, FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the division member DV, and FIG. 58 is an exploded rear perspective view of the division member DV. 56 to 58, in order to understand the connection structure between the division members DV, the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division members DV is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

Here, in the present embodiment, a part to be detected 641c (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of dividing members DV is formed with the detected portion 641c, while the remaining dividing members DV are: The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. The division member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed and the division member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted have the same configuration except the presence or absence of the detected portion 641c. Therefore, hereinafter, the division member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed will be described, and the description of the division member DV in which the formation of the detected portion 641c will be omitted will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the division member DV includes an engaged portion 641, a rear body 642 on which the engaged portion 641 is disposed on the rear side, and a front side of the rear body 642. Disposed on the front side of the front side main body 643, a connection link member 644 whose proximal end side is rotatably supported between the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643. The plate holding member 645, the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 movably held by the plate holding member 645, and the front side main body 643 and the plate holding member 645 are slidably displaceable. The undulating link member 648 is mainly provided.

As described above, the engaged portion 641 is a portion that is engaged with the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 of the drive mechanism 630, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape in a front view, The rear side main body 642 is disposed in a posture in which it projects from the rear side on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 56(b)).

On the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the rear body 642, an opposed portion 641a that is opposed to the rear surface of the rear body 642 at a predetermined interval is formed. The opposed portion 641a and the rear body The outer edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the surfaces facing the 642. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (one side in the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642) from the front surface of the guide member 620.

A pair of cylindrical sliding rollers 641b are rotatably supported on the mounting surface side of the engaged portion 641 to the rear body 642. The sliding roller 641b has its rotation axis orthogonal to the back surface of the back-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV), and its outer peripheral surface can contact the outer peripheral surface of the outer edge portion of the guide member 620. Arranged in a posture. This can reduce the sliding resistance when the dividing member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620.

On the other hand, a plate-shaped detected portion 641c is formed so as to overhang on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the engaged portion 641 to the rear body 642. The detected portion 641c is a plate-shaped portion that is detected by the detection sensor 684 provided on the guide member 680, and has a horizontal posture on the back surface of the back-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV). It

The back side main body 642 is a portion whose back surface is placed on the front surface of the guide member 620 and slides on the front surface of the guide member 620 when the rotating member 640 rotates, and is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view. When the rotating member 640 is arranged on the guide member 620, the rear-side main body 642 is arranged with its longitudinal direction along the radial direction of the guide member 620. That is, each back side main body portion 642 is arranged in a radial straight line centered on the axis O (see FIG. 54).

The back-side main body 642 is provided with a connection link opening 642a and an up-and-down link opening 642b, which are groove-shaped openings extending linearly along the longitudinal direction, and on the front side on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 57). A shaft support portion 642c that is formed to pivotally support the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the front side main body 643 (shaft support portion 643b) and a bent portion that projects from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 58). And 642d.

The connection link opening 642a is an opening through which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 of the adjacent division member DV is slidably inserted. By inserting the insertion portion 644a into the connection link opening 642a, the division member is inserted. The DV can be connected to the adjacent division member DV via the connection link member 644. Further, the connecting link member 644 inserts the tip of the insertion portion 644a inserted through the connecting link opening 642a into the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620.

The opening width of the connection link opening 642a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644. Therefore, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 can be slid (guided) along the extension direction of the connection link opening 642a.

When the insertion member 644a of the connecting link member 644 receives an action from the connecting link action groove 621 of the guide member 620 when the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guiding member 620, the insertion member 644a is opened. By sliding along, it is possible to allow the posture of the connecting link member 644 to change with the action from the connecting link action groove 621. As a result, the posture of the connection link member 644 with respect to the rear-side main body 642 can be generated, and the distance between the division members DV can be increased or decreased.

The undulating link opening 642b is an opening through which the insertion portion 648a of the undulation link member 648 is slidably inserted. The undulation link member 648 guides the tip of the insertion portion 648a inserted into the undulation link opening 642b as a guide member. It is inserted into the undulating link action groove 622 of 620.

The opening width of the undulating link opening 642b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648. Therefore, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link 648 can be slid (guided) along the extending direction of the undulating link opening 642b.

When the dividing member DV is displaced in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, when the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 is acted by the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 648a is opened and closed 642b. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 can be undulated by being slid along.

As described above, since the shaft support portion 642c is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (lower side in FIG. 57), the base end side of the connection link member 644 and the engaged portion 641 in front view. It can be pivoted at the overlapping position. Therefore, when the engaged portion 641 is driven by the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 and the division member DV is displaced along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacements are adjacent to each other. It can be easily transmitted to the divided member DV via the connecting link member 644.

The bent portion 642d is provided so as to project from the back surface on the other side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the longitudinal direction of the back surface side body 642, and the protruding tip end faces the back surface of the back surface side body 642 at a predetermined interval. The inner edge portion of the guide member 620 is slidably sandwiched between the curved portion of the protruding tip and the facing surface of the rear-side body 642. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the split member DV (the other side in the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642) from the front surface of the guide member 620.

Further, the bent portion 642d is arranged such that the base portion thereof can be brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the inner edge portion of the guide member 620, and the facing distance between the base portion of the bent portion 642d and the sliding roller 641b is The size is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the radial width of the guide member 620. As a result, the displacement of the dividing member DV in the radial direction of the guide member 620 can be regulated, so that the main body member DV (back side main body 642) remains in a posture in which its longitudinal direction is along the radial direction of the guide member 620. Thus, the guide member 620 can be displaced in the circumferential direction.

The front-side main body 643 is a member that is formed in a plate shape that is substantially the same size as the back-side main body 642 and has a rectangular shape in a front view, and is a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction. A shaft support 643b that pivotally supports the base end side of the connection link member 644 between the link slide groove 643a and the back side main body 642 (shaft support 642c) that is formed on the back surface on one side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 58). And a support plate 643c that is provided so as to project from the front and rotatably supports the partition plate 647.

The undulating link slide groove 643a is a linear groove in which the undulating link member 648 is slidably arranged, and extends parallel to the undulating link opening 642b. That is, the undulating link member 648 slides along the undulating link slide groove 643a, so that the insertion portion 648a slides along the undulating link opening 642b.

In the front view, the rear side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 have the width dimension on the other side in the longitudinal direction smaller than the width dimension on the one side in the longitudinal direction. That is, the width dimension of the portion located on the inner circumference side is smaller than the width dimension of the portion located on the outer circumference side of the rotating member 640, and the wedge shape is formed in a front view. Therefore, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made smaller so that the dividing members DV can be brought closer to each other, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, in the second section S2, the back-side body 642 and the front-side body 643 are circumferentially abutted with the adjacent back-side body 642 and front-side body 643 (see FIGS. 54 and 73). ..

The connection link member 644 is a long member, and the base end side is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting portions 642c and 643b of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643, and a cylindrical insertion portion on the tip side. 644a is formed. The insertion portion 644a is projected in a posture parallel to the rotation axis of the connection link member 644, and as described above, the connection link of the guide member 620 via the connection link opening 642a of the back side main body 642 in the adjacent division member DV. It is inserted into the working groove 621.

The diameter of the insertion portion 644a is set to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the groove widths of the connection link opening 642a and the connection link action groove 621. Therefore, during the rotation of the rotating member 640, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the split member DV with respect to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link 644 to the minimum, and it is possible to easily maintain a constant interval between the split members DV. As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional variation of the detected portion 641c, so that it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684 (see FIG. 71).

In addition, the rear end side body 642 and the front side main body 643 of the connection link member 644 are rotatably supported at the base end side (that is, the shaft support portions 642c and 643b of the respective main bodies 642 and 643) from the connection link opening 642a. Is also disposed at a position close to the engaged portion 641. In the present embodiment, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is arranged at a position overlapping the engaged portion 641 in a front view (viewed in the direction of the axis O of the rotating member 640).

As a result, the engaging portions 637b and 638b of the one-side and other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 are engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV, and the one-side and the other-side rotation driving members 637 and 638 rotate. When the division member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the displacement of the division member DV can be easily transmitted to the adjacent division member DV via the connection link member 644. As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

The up-and-down link member 648 is a member that is slidably held in the up-and-down link slide groove 643a of the front side main body 643, and has a cylindrical insertion portion 648a formed on the back side and an action groove 648b on the front side. It is formed. The insertion portion 648a is projected in a posture parallel to the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644, and as described above, is inserted into the undulation link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 via the undulation link opening 642b of the rear body 642. Is inserted.

The action groove 648b is a portion for acting on the acted portion 646d of the display plate 646 by sliding displacement of the undulation link member 648 and undulating the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647. The acting portion 646d of the display plate 646 is slidably inserted between the facing surfaces of the groove-shaped portion, which is formed in a groove shape linearly extending along the sliding direction.

The display plate 646 includes a plate portion 646a formed in a rectangular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 646b and a connecting shaft 646c formed on one side of the plate portion 646a, and an action groove 648b of the undulating link member 648 facing each other. And a plate-shaped operated portion 646d inserted between the surfaces. Since the actuated portion 646d is bent and formed in a substantially S-shape when viewed from the front, when the undulating link member 648 is slid and displaced, the actuated portion 646d is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the sliding displacement direction, The display plate 646 can be rotated about the shaft portion 646b as a rotation center.

The partition plate 647 has a plate-shaped plate portion 647a formed in a trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, a pair of shaft portions 647b formed on one side of the plate portion 647a, and the same side of the pair of shaft portions 647b. And a shaft support portion 647c that rotatably supports the connection shaft 646c of the display plate 646.

Here, as described above, the rotation unit 600 is configured to imitate a roulette that rotates a wheel in which a plurality of pockets are continuously arranged in the circumferential direction and drops the thrown ball into one of the pockets. The space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 of the one division member DV and the partition plate 647 of the adjacent division member DV is a pocket, and the display plate 646 (the plate portion 646a) has a red color. Alternatively, a black color is added and different numbers (1 to 29) are displayed.

In this embodiment, one display plate 646 is given a green color and a predetermined mark (star shape) is displayed. Further, regarding the rotating member 640, only the display plate 646 located in the first section S1 is visually recognized by the player. That is, the display plate 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by other members arranged on the front side of the display plate 646 and invisible to the player.

The plate holding member 645 includes a shaft support portion 645a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 646b of the display plate 646 and a shaft support portion 645b that rotatably supports the shaft portion 647b of the partition plate 647. The display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are rotatably supported on the upper surface side (front side) of the front side main body 643 by the pivotal support of 645a and 645b.

In this case, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, the display plate 646 is rotated about the shaft portion 646b as the undulating link member 648 slides. Then, the rotation is transmitted to the partition plate 647 through the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, and the partition plate 647 is rotated about the shaft portion 647b. The rotation of the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

59(a) and 59(b) are a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the division member DV in a state of being arranged in the first section S1, and FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b) are FIG. 9 is a top perspective view and a bottom perspective view of the division member DV in a state where the division member DV is arranged in the second section S2. 59 and 60 show a state in which a part of the configuration is seen through for the sake of easy understanding, and the connection link member 644, the detected portion 641c, and the bent portion 642d are omitted. As shown in FIG. 59, in the state where the division member DV is arranged in the first section S1, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 becomes the small diameter portion 622b (see FIG. 50) of the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620. Is inserted. Therefore, the up-and-down link member 648 is slid and displaced to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the inner peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the axial center O side), As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in the horizontal posture, while the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is arranged in the standing posture.

It should be noted that the horizontal posture is a posture in which the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is parallel to the back surface of the rear body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV), and the standing posture is the plate of the partition plate 647. The portion 647a is in a posture in which it is orthogonally parallel to the back surface of the back-side main body 642 (that is, the moving plane of the dividing member DV).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the state where the division member DV is arranged in the second section S2, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 has a large diameter portion 622a in the undulating link action groove 622 of the guide member 620 (see FIG. 50). Is inserted into. Therefore, the up-and-down link member 648 is slid and displaced to one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 and the front side main body 643 (that is, the outer peripheral side of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640, the side opposite to the axis O). As a result, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted from the horizontal posture to the plate portion 647a side of the partition plate 647 and is placed in an inclined posture, and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is moved from the standing posture. The display plate 646 is tilted to the plate portion 646a side and arranged in a tilted posture.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647 are connected by the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, by rotating the display plate 646 with the slide displacement of the undulating link member 648, The partition plate 647 can also be rotated via the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support 647c.

Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide the undulation link action groove and the undulation link member for each of the mechanism for rotating the display plate 646 and the mechanism for rotating the partition plate 647, and the undulation of both mechanisms is not necessary. The link action groove and the undulating link member can be shared. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is heavier than the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 60 (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is tilted downward), the state shown in FIG. When the plate portion 646a of the plate 646 is in the horizontal posture and the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 is in the upright posture), the rotating action of the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) due to its own weight is used. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

That is, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is lifted upward, it is possible to form a horizontal posture by rotating with its own weight in the direction in which it is tilted downward, and the display plate 646 rotates (self-weight). Is transmitted to the partition plate 647 through the connecting shaft 646c and the shaft support portion 647c, so that the partition plate 647 can be lifted and a standing posture can be formed. Therefore, even if the rotation is hindered by the attachment of dirt or dust, the state shown in FIG. 59 can be formed reliably and promptly.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is set to have a dimension such that the protruding length of the plate portion 646a from the shaft portion 646b is larger than the protruding length of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 from the shaft portion 647b. Therefore, the center of gravity of the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 can be separated from the shaft portion 646b, and the center of gravity of the plate portion 647a of the partition plate 647 can be brought close to the shaft portion 647b. As a result, the state shown in FIG. 59 is formed. Can be performed more reliably and promptly by utilizing the own weight of the display plate 646.

It returns to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48 and demonstrates. The pitching device 650 is a device for pitching the ball B onto the rotating member 640, is housed in the central recess of the central transmission member 634 of the drive mechanism 630, and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the rotating member 640. Here, the pitching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 69.

61 and 62 are exploded front perspective views of the pitching device 650. In FIG. 62, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is attached to the case body 651, and the passage member 655 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the pitching device 650 includes a case body 651 formed in a container shape with an open front side, an arm rotation mechanism 660 disposed inside the case body 651, and a holding piece protruding/retracting. Mainly includes a mechanism 670, a passage member 655 arranged on the front side of the case body 651, and a sphere B formed in a spherical shape from a translucent material.

The case body 651 includes a bottom wall portion 651a that is substantially circular in a front view, a substantially cylindrical outer wall portion 651b that is erected from the bottom wall portion 651a toward the front, and a radially outer side from the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b. And a protruding wall portion 651c that is formed by protruding in a flange shape toward one side, and the protruding wall portion 651c is fastened and fixed to the rear surface side of the guide member 620, so that the standing tip (opening portion) of the outer wall portion 651b. Is disposed at a position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the rotating member 640 (the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646).

A ball holding portion 652 is arranged on the front surface of the bottom wall portion 651a. In the sphere holding portion 652, a spherical recess having a size corresponding to the outer diameter of the sphere B is formed on the front surface, and the recess is the holding position (initial position) of the sphere B. That is, when the ball B is placed on the ball holding portion 652, the ball B is held between the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b and the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 (see FIG. 44).

In this case, the pitching device 650 is arranged such that the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is located at the lowermost position, and when the arm member 664 of the arm rotating mechanism 660 is rotated, the ball B is moved to the outer wall portion. It rolls on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of 651b and is held on the holding piece 677 at the projecting position of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 (see FIG. 68). Here, the arm rotation mechanism 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65.

FIG. 63 is an exploded front perspective view of the arm rotation mechanism 660. 64 is a front view of the pitching device 660 in a state where the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is arranged at the holding position, and FIG. 65 is a view showing the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 arranged at the separated position. It is a front view of the pitching device 660 in the raised state. 64 and 65, a state in which the front case 662 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is removed is illustrated for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the arm rotation mechanism 660 includes a rear case 661 disposed on the bottom wall portion 651 a of the case body 651, a front case 662 disposed in front of the rear case 661, A crank member 663 and an arm member 664 that are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the rear case 661 and the front case 662, a drive motor 665 for driving the crank member 663 and the arm member 664, and a pinion gear 666 are provided. ..

Shafts 661a and 661b are provided in a protruding manner on the rear case 661, and a crank member 663 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661a and an arm member 664 is rotatably supported on the shaft 661b. A gear 663a with which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is engraved on the crank member 663, and a pin portion 663b is provided at a position eccentric from the center of rotation (shaft 661a). Further, the arm member 664 is linearly extended with a sliding groove 664a into which the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is slidably inserted, and the rotation center (the shaft 661b) with respect to the sliding groove 664a. ), a curved portion 664b having a front view shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into halves is formed at a position on the opposite side.

Therefore, the drive motor 665 is rotationally driven in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and the crank member 663 is rotated through the rotation of the pinion gear 666 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 655, and the pin portion 663b of the crank member 663 is rotated. By acting on the sliding groove 664a of the arm member 664, the arm member 664 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction about the shaft 661b as the rotation center.

That is, the arm member 664 holds the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 by holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 by holding the sphere B on the sphere holding portion 652 along the curved shape of the bending portion 664b along the outer peripheral portion of the sphere holding portion 652. The sphere B can be rotated (swing) between the sphere B and the separated position (see FIG. 65) where the sphere B is dropped from the sphere holding part 652 to the inner peripheral passage 651c1.

In the present embodiment, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the curved portion 664b (range of the central angle of about 90 degrees on the side separated from the shaft 661b (lower side)) is formed by the cantilever plate 664c. The cantilever plate 664c is a plate-like body that curves along the inner peripheral surface of the bending portion 664b, and a shaft 664c1 provided at the base end side thereof is rotatably supported by the bending portion 664b and at the tip end side. The elastic force of the leaf spring 667a of the limit switch 667 disposed on the back side (outer peripheral surface side) of the limit switch 667 keeps the posture of being lifted upward (inward in the radial direction).

Therefore, when the ball B is held by the ball holding portion 652 in a state where the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position, the weight of the ball B causes the cantilever plate 664c to be pushed down around the shaft 664c1 as a rotation center, While the limit switch 667 is turned on, when the ball B is not held in the ball holding portion 652, the cantilever plate 664c is in the lifted position as described above, and the limit switch 667 is turned off. As a result, the presence/absence of the sphere B in the sphere holder 652 can be detected.

In this case, the curved portion 664b of the arm member 664 and the recess of the ball holding portion 652 are formed to have a size such that the ball B can be displaced when the arm member 664 is arranged at the holding position. That is, the inner diameter of the curved portion 664b and the inner diameter of the recess of the sphere holding portion 652 are made larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when an external force (vibration) is input by the player hitting or rocking the pachinko machine 10, the ball B can be displaced along with the input of the vibration. That is, when the ball B is displaced (vibrated), the cantilever plate 664c can be displaced along with the vibration, and the limit switch 667 can be turned on/off. As a result, by monitoring the state of the limit switch 667, the arm rotation mechanism 660 can be used to detect the input of the external force to the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, description will be made. As described above, when the arm member 664 of the arm rotation mechanism 660 is rotated to the separated position, the sphere B rolls on the inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral passage 651c1) of the outer wall portion 651b and the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 moves. It is held on the holding piece 677 in the protruding position (see FIG. 68). The holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed such that the holding piece 677 can be retracted between the projecting position and the retracted position, and when the retaining piece 677 is retracted into the retracted position, the ball B is moved to the rotating member 640. It is thrown on any one of the divided members DV (display plate 646). Here, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

FIG. 66 is an exploded front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged in the protruding position, and FIG. 67 is a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state in which the holding piece 677 is arranged in the retracted position. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG.

68A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the projecting position, and FIG. 68B is a holding along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb of FIG. 68A. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the one-sided retracting mechanism 670. 69A is a front perspective view of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in a state where the holding piece 677 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 69B is a LXIXb-LXIXb line of FIG. 69A. 6 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a holding piece retracting mechanism 670 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. 69, the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 is formed to be curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 651a of the case body 651. Back case 671, a front case 672 disposed in front of the back case 671, a slide member 673 slidably held between the facing surfaces of the back case 671 and the front case 672, and a slide member thereof. A drive motor 675 for driving the 673 and a pinion gear 676, and a holding piece 677 that is projected and retracted with the slide displacement of the slide member 673 are provided.

The rear case 671 is provided with two pairs of roller members 674 arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval, and the slide member 673 is slidably held between the roller members 674 of each set facing each other. Further, the rear case 671 includes a sliding base 671a that is formed in a rectangular plate shape in a top view and is formed to project from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction toward the front side. The upper surface of the sliding base 671a and the front base 672 are provided. The sliding displacement (projection to the front side and sinking to the back side) of the holding piece 677 is guided between the holding piece 677 and the lower surface (outer peripheral surface).

A pin portion 673a is projected from one end side (lower portion) in the circumferential direction of the slide member 673, and a rack gear 673b with which a pinion gear 676 is meshed is formed on the inner circumferential surface of the other end side (information portion) in the circumferential direction. Carved along. In addition, a sliding groove 677a into which the pin portion 673a of the slide member 673 is slidably inserted is bent and extended in a substantially Z shape in the holding piece 677. That is, one end side (right side in FIG. 66) of the sliding groove 677a is offset to the front side rather than the other end side (left side in FIG. 66).

Therefore, by rotating the drive motor 675 in the forward or reverse direction and rotating the pinion gear 676 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 675, the slide member 673 is slid and displaced through the rack gear 673b, and the slide member 673 is slid. By causing the pin portion 673a of the member 673 to act on the sliding groove 677a of the holding piece 677, the holding piece 677 can be projected to the front side or retracted to the back side. That is, the holding piece 677 can be slidably displaced between the protruding position (see FIG. 68) protruding toward the front side and the retracted position (see FIG. 69) retracted toward the back side.

Here, the upper surface of the holding piece 677 is located on the back side (right side of FIG. 68(b) and FIG. 69(b)), and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 651b of the case body 651 (that is, the inner peripheral passage 651c1). A curved surface 677b that is concentrically curved and smoothly connects to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 in the circumferential direction, and is connected to an edge portion of the curved surface 677b and extends toward the front side (left side in FIGS. 68B and 69B). A rising slope 677c that is sloped up in accordance with the above, and a descending slope 677d that is connected to the edge of the rising slope 677c and that is sloped down toward the front side are formed.

Therefore, when the holding piece 677 is arranged at the projecting position (see FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b)), the holding piece 677 is dropped from the ball holding portion 652 and rolls in the inner peripheral passage 651c1 to bend the holding piece 677. The ball B reaching the surface 677b is restricted from rolling to the front side (left side in FIG. 68(b)) by the ascending slope of the ascending slope surface 677c, and is held on the holding piece 677 (curved surface 677b). You can

On the other hand, when the holding piece 677 is retracted from the protruding position to the back side and is placed at the retracted position (see FIGS. 69(a) and 69(b)), the front side of the front case 672 causes the back side (see FIG. 69(b)). ) The sphere B whose movement to the right side) is restricted passes over the ascending slope 677c and is positioned on the descending slope 677d as the holding piece 677 is displaced in the retracting direction (rear side). As a result, the ball B can be rolled along the descending inclination of the descending inclined surface 677d, and the ball B can be thrown to the front side (the split member DV of the rotating member 640).

Since the curved surface 677b is smoothly connected to the inner peripheral passage 651c1 on both sides in the circumferential direction, the curved surface 677b of the retaining piece 677 is curved from the ball B dropped from the sphere holding portion 652 and rolling on the inner peripheral passage 651c1. It can pass on the surface 677b and roll to the other inner peripheral passage 651c1. That is, the sphere B can be reciprocated between the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on one side in the circumferential direction and the inner circumferential passage 651c1 on the other side in the circumferential direction via the curved surface 677b. Further, since the curved surface 677b of the holding piece 677 is located below the inner peripheral passage 651c1, when the ball B loses its momentum and its rolling is converged, the ball B is positioned on the curved surface 677b. Can be made.

It returns to FIG. 61 and demonstrates. As described above, the passage member 655 is arranged on the front side of the case body 651. The passage member 655 is located on the front side of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670, and the ball B thrown by the immersing operation of the holding piece 677 (immersion to the immersing position) divides the ball B into the dividing member DV (display). It is provided with a ball feeding passage 655a which serves as a passage when the ball is fed onto the plate 646) and a returning passage 655b which serves as a passage when returning the ball B fed from the split member DV of the rotating member 640 to the ball holding portion 652.

The ball feeding passage 655a has a groove portion 655a1 having a substantially U-shaped cross section and having substantially the same width dimension as the descending inclined surface 677d of the holding piece 677 of the holding piece retracting mechanism 670 and extending from the groove portion 655a1 to the front side. A front portion 655a2 that is continuous with the side edge portion and that is substantially flush with the display plate 646 of the divided member DV of the rotating member 640, and is erected from both sides in the width direction of the front portion 655a2 and the divided member DV of the rotating member 640. The partition plate 647 includes a pair of facing portions 655a3 facing each other at substantially the same spacing.

Therefore, when the retaining piece 677 of the retaining piece retracting mechanism 670 is retracted to the retracted position, the ball B rolled on the descending inclined surface 677d of the retaining piece 677 is received by the groove portion 655a1 and the extending direction of the groove portion 655a1. By rolling along the ball, the ball B can be thrown while suppressing rattling.

Further, since the front portion 655a2 is flush with the display plate 646 of the split member DV, and the facing distance between the pair of facing portions 655a3 is substantially the same as the facing distance between the partition plates 647 of the split member DV, the pitching is performed. The sphere B thus formed can be smoothly arranged on the display plate 646 of the division member DV. When the ball B is pitched, the rotating member 640 is stopped at a phase (rotational position) where the partition plate 647 of the dividing member DV matches the facing portion 655a3, based on the detection result of the detection sensor 684 described later.

The return passage 655b has a rolling portion 655b1 as a rolling surface that rolls to the downstream side when receiving the ball B fed from the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 on the upstream side, and on the downstream side of the rolling portion 655b1. And an upright portion 655b2 which is formed in a curved shape so as to direct the rolling direction of the ball B to the back side.

In the front view of the pitching device 650, the rolling portion 655b1 is arranged on the upstream side at the inner peripheral edge portion of the rotating member 640 and on the downstream side in front of the ball holding portion 652b. Further, the rolling portion 6551b1 is formed so as to be downwardly inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side, and the downstream side is downwardly inclined to the ball holding portion 652.

The sphere B placed on the division member DV of the rotating member 640 and conveyed in the circumferential direction in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 640 is moved radially inward by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b of the guide member 680 described later. When the ball B is pushed out toward the upstream side of the return passage 655b, the ball B is rolled in the rolling portion 655b1 to the downstream side and dropped to the ball holding portion 652 while being guided by the standing portion 655b2. It

It returns to FIG. 43 to FIG. 48 and demonstrates. As described above, the guide member 680 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640. The guide member 680 is a member arranged along the lower portion of the rotating member 640, and guides the sphere B on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 at the time of conveyance accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 640 (that is, It supports the sphere B from below) and holds a detection sensor 684 for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640. Here, the guide member 680 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

70 is a front perspective view of the guide member 680, and FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the guide member 680. As shown in FIG. 70, the guide member 680 includes a base 681 arranged on the case member 610, a plate-shaped transmission plate 682 arranged on the front side of the base 681, and a rear side of the transmission plate 682. Mainly includes a cantilever plate 683 disposed on the base plate 681 and a plurality of (six in this embodiment) detection sensors 684 disposed on the base 681.

The base portion 681 is a member formed in a shape in which an annular shape is divided at a central angle of approximately 120 degrees (that is, a shape curved in an arc shape in a front view), and a guide surface 681a is formed on the inner peripheral surface side thereof. .. The guide surface 681a is arranged on the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member 640, and faces the sphere B arranged on the division member DV (that is, the space surrounded by the display plate 646 and the partition plate 647). That is, the sphere B, which is arranged on the divided member DV of the rotating member 640 and is conveyed as the rotating member 640 rotates, is supported from below.

Further, on the inner peripheral surface side of the base portion 681, a return guide 681b continuous with the downstream side (right side in FIG. 70) of the guide surface 681a is formed. The return guide 681b is a part for sending the ball B conveyed along with the rotation of the rotating member 640 to the return passage 655b of the passage member 655, and has a width dimension smaller than that of the guide surface 681a and a radial direction. By being formed so as to project inward, it is arranged so as to face the split member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 (see FIGS. 43 and 44 ).

Therefore, when the sphere B placed on the dividing member DV of the rotating member 640 is conveyed in the circumferential direction as the rotating member 640 rotates, the return plate is guided by the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) of the dividing member DV. The sphere B is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of 681b. Therefore, when the rotating member 640 is further rotated, the sphere B is pushed inward in the radial direction by the action of the partition plate 647 and the return guide 681b and is conveyed to the upstream side of the return passage 655b.

Here, even when the formation of the return guide 681b is omitted, if the rotation member 640 is rotated to the position where the partition plate 647 (plate portion 647a) is inclined downward toward the return passage 655b, the partition plate 647b is rotated. The ball B can be dropped into the return passage 655b along the descending inclination of 647. However, in this case, since the ball B is conveyed upward by the time the ball B starts rolling due to its own weight, the drop position when the ball B is dropped becomes high and the partition plate 647 is Since the ball B rolls along the descending slope and then falls, the momentum when the ball B falls is large. Therefore, the return passage 655b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, by providing the return guide 681b, the drop position when the ball B is dropped into the return passage 655b can be lowered, and the ball B slides on the return guide 681b. Since the ball is sent to the return passage 655b while being conveyed, the ball sending speed can be reduced. As a result, damage to the return passage 655b can be suppressed.

The transmissive plate 682 is a portion that is opposed to the division member DV (display plate 646) of the rotating member 640 at a predetermined interval (interval capable of holding the sphere B), and a part of the upper edge side part in the widthwise center is formed. The passage member 655 is extended upward to a position facing the ball feeding passage 655a (front face portion 655a2). As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 to the split member DV of the rotating member 640 from jumping to the outside.

Further, the transmission plate 682 is not only the dividing member DV on which the ball B is thrown (that is, the dividing member DV having the same phase as the front surface portion 655a2 of the ball feeding passage 655a) but also the downstream side of the dividing member DV (of the ball B). The dividing member DV adjacent to the downstream side in the conveying direction is also formed to have a size (width dimension) that can partially face the dividing member DV, so that the violent movement of the ball B thrown from the ball feeding passage 655a is prevented from being transmitted to the transmitting plate 682. It can be easily converged between them, and the ball B can be stably conveyed to the return guide 681b.

On the other hand, the transparent plate 682 has a size (width dimension) capable of facing the dividing member DV on which the ball B is thrown and the dividing member DV adjacent to the downstream side of the dividing member DV, and the dividing members DV to be thrown. Also, the divided members DV located downstream of the adjacent divided members DV are not faced. That is, the sphere B can be exposed between the edge of the transmission plate 682 on the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 70) in the conveyance direction of the sphere B and the return guide 681b, and the player can visually recognize the conveyance of the sphere B. It can be made easier.

Since the entire transparent plate 682 is made of a light-transmissive material, the player can see through the member and the ball B located on the back side thereof. Therefore, the pitched ball B passes through the ball feeding passage 655a and is dropped between the display plate 647 and the transmission plate 682 of the dividing member DV, and is rotated by the rotation member 640 while being supported by the guide surface 681a. It is possible for the player to visually recognize a series of modes to be carried.

The cantilever plate 683 is a member that forms the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681 together with the guide surface 681a, and is formed as a plate-like body that curves along the guide surface 681a (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the base portion 681). One end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is rotatably supported by the base 681 by a shaft 685, and the other end of the cantilever plate 683 in the circumferential direction is elastically supported by a leaf spring of a limit switch (not shown) arranged on the base 681. It is maintained in a posture of being lifted upward (inward in the radial direction).

In a posture in which the other end side in the circumferential direction of the cantilever plate 683 is lifted upward, the limit switch is off, and when the ball B is thrown from the pitching device 650 to the split member DV of the rotating member 640, the ball B The weight causes the cantilever plate 683 to be pushed down around the shaft 685 as the center of rotation, and the limit switch is turned on. As a result, it can be detected that the ball B thrown from the pitching device 650 is arranged at an appropriate position (divided member DV of the rotating member 640).

On the other hand, when the ball B is conveyed as the rotating member 640 rotates and the weight of the ball B acting on the cantilever plate 683 is reduced to a predetermined value or less, the cantilever plate 683 is lifted as described above. Return to and turn off the limit switch.

The detection sensor 684 is a sensor device for detecting the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640, and is formed as a non-contact sensor in which the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are arranged to face each other, and its detection area (the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion) is provided. (Part facing space) on the movement locus of the detected part 641c of the division member DV in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54), and are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval between the detection sensors 684 is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the divided members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1.

Therefore, a plurality of (six in the present embodiment) divided members DV that are adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction can be arranged at the positions corresponding to the detection sensors 684, respectively, and the rotating member 640 corresponds to a predetermined amount (that is, corresponds to the first interval). The dividing member DV detected by each detection sensor 684 can be displaced in the circumferential direction each time the rotation amount is rotated.

In this case, as described above, the part to be detected 641c is formed on a part (15 in the present embodiment) of the plurality of division members DV, while the remaining division members DV are The formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. Therefore, in the detection sensor 684 in which the division member DV in which the detected portion 641c is formed is arranged, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portion 641c, and the detection signal is turned off. In the detection sensor 684 in which the division member DV in which the detected portion 641c is not formed is arranged, the light receiving portion can receive the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the detection signal is turned on (see FIG. 76). As a result, as will be described later, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors 684.

In the present embodiment, two detection results (on/off) based on the presence/absence of the detected portion 641c of the division member DV are performed by the six detection sensors 684, respectively, so 64 (=2 to the 6th power) Street combinations can be formed. In this case, since the number of divided members DV provided is 30, the detection sensor 684 detects which one of these divided members DV is located at the reference position, as will be described later. It can always be determined based on the result.

Next, the operation of the rotation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. First, the operation of changing the distance between the division members DV when the rotation member 640 is rotated will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

FIG. 72 is a front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640. 73(a) is a partially enlarged front view of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the first section S1, and FIG. 73(b) is a part of the guide member 620 and the rotating member 640 in the second section S2. It is an enlarged front view.

72 and 73, only the rear-side main body 642, the connecting link member 644, and the undulating link member 648 of the components of the dividing member DV are shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding. In addition, FIG. 73 illustrates a state in which the connecting link action groove 621 and the undulating link action groove 622 are hatched.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rotating member 640 is a member that is formed so as to be rotatable around the axis O as the center of rotation (that is, along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620), and includes a plurality of dividing members DV. Are formed in an endless shape by connecting in the circumferential direction. That is, in each of the division members DV, the base end side of the connection link member 644 is rotatably supported by the back side main body 642, while the insertion portion 644a on the tip end side of the connection link member 644 is adjacent to the back side of the division member DV. It is inserted into the connection link action groove 621 through the connection link opening 642a in the main body 642.

As described above, in the rear-side main body 642 of the dividing member DV, the sliding roller 641b on the one side in the longitudinal direction and the bent portion 642 on the other side in the longitudinal direction are in contact with the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the guide member 620. When the guide member 620 is moved in the circumferential direction, the posture of the guide member 620 with respect to the guide member 620 is such that the axis O is located on the extension line of the back side main body 642 in the longitudinal direction (that is, the axis O radiates around the axis O as a center). A straight posture) is maintained. That is, only movement is allowed while maintaining that posture.

In this case, the large diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position closer to the base end side (the side rotatably supported by the shaft) of the connecting link member 644 than the small diameter portion 621b. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the action groove 621 (see FIG. 73A), the connection link member 644 is tilted with respect to the longitudinal direction of the rear body 642. As a result, the back side main bodies 642 can be separated from each other. That is, the distance between the division members DV (back side main body 642) in the first section S1 can be set to a large distance (first distance).

On the other hand, the small diameter portion 621b of the connecting link action groove 621 is formed at a position farther from the base end side (the side rotatably supported by the shaft) of the connecting link member 644 than the large diameter portion 621a. When the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the small-diameter portion 621b of the groove 621 (see FIG. 73(b)), the connection link member 644 is placed in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642, The side main bodies 642 can be brought close to each other. That is, the interval between the divided members DV (back side main body 642) in the second section S2 can be set to a small interval (second interval).

Here, the rotating member 640 is a rendering device formed by imitating a roulette as described above, and identification information such as numbers and marks is displayed on the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a). That is, the production is performed by allowing the player to visually recognize the identification information displayed on the display plate 646. Therefore, considering the visibility of the player, it is preferable that the display plate 646 (display of the identification information) is large, and in order to secure the variation of the effect, the number of the display plates 646 (the identification information It is preferable that there are many types.

In this case, considering the visibility of the player, the display of the identification information (that is, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646) needs to have a certain size or more, but the size is maintained. However, if the number of display of the identification information (the number of the display plates 646) is increased, the diameter of the rotating member 640 increases, and the rotating member 640 cannot be accommodated in the predetermined installation space. When the diameter is reduced, the number of displayed identification information (the number of display plates 646) decreases, and it becomes impossible to secure the variation of the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first section S1 in which the division members DV are circumferentially connected at the first interval, and the first section S1 having a narrower interval than the first section S1. As described above, the display plate 646 (plate portion 646a) located in the first section S1 is formed while enabling the rotation member 640 to form the second section S2 in which the division members DV are circumferentially connected at the interval of 2. The player visually recognizes it (the display plate 646 located in the second section S2 is shielded by another member).

Therefore, the length of the rotating member 640 in the circumferential direction can be reduced as compared with the case where all of the plurality of divided members DV are connected at the first interval, and the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of display of the identification information (the number of display plates 646) while ensuring a certain size or more for the display of the identification information (that is, the display plate 646). As a result, it becomes impossible to secure the visibility of the player and the variation of the effect.

Here, in the division member DV, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is arranged in the horizontal posture (the posture parallel to the movement plane of the division member DV) in the first section S1, as described above, the display plate is not provided. The identification information displayed on 646 can be easily seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the second section S2, as described above, since the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is in a posture in which the tip end side is raised more than the horizontal posture in the first section S1, the division member DV is adjacent to the division member DV. The interference with the DV can be suppressed, and the divided members DV can be brought closer to each other by that amount. That is, the interval (second interval) between the division members DV in the second section S2 can be narrowed. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for the arrangement can be suppressed.

Particularly, according to the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is disposed on the upper surface of the front side main body 643 so as to be displaceable (rotatable), and in the second section S2, the plate portion 646a is connected to the adjacent dividing member DV (plate holding member). It can be lifted above the upper surface of the member 645 (that is, at a position where it does not interfere) (see FIG. 54). Therefore, the split members DV can be brought close to a position where the rear body 642 and the front body 643 contact each other. That is, the second interval in the second section S2 can be made narrower. As a result, the circumferential length of the rotating member 640 can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the rotating member can be suppressed.

Next, the driving operation of the rotating member 640 by the driving mechanism 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74(a) to 74(d) are state transition diagrams each time the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by 30 degrees, and the one-side rotation driving member 637 viewed from the front is illustrated.

74(b), 74(c) and 74(d) correspond to the states rotated by 30 degrees, 60 degrees and 90 degrees from FIG. 74(a), respectively. In addition, in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d), the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV is shown in a cross-sectional view, and the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. Is illustrated using.

Here, the one side rotation drive member 637 and the other side rotation drive member 638 are formed in the same shape as each other as described above. In the drive operation of the rotary member 640 by these, only the drive operation by the one side rotary drive member 637 will be described, and the description of the drive operation by the other side rotary drive member 638 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74(a) to 74(d), in the one-sided rotation driving member 637, the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b partially corresponds to the movement locus of the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV. It is arranged at an overlapping position, and in the overlapping portion, the engaging portion 637b is rotatable while being engaged with the engaged portion 641. The circle of the movement locus of the engaging portion 637b is an inscribed circle having a smaller diameter than the circle of the movement locus of the engaged portion 641.

When the one-side rotation driving member 637 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 53), the rotation is transmitted to the division member DV through the engagement of the engaging portion 637b and the engaged portion 641. The dividing member DV is moved along the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, and the movement is transmitted to the adjacent dividing members DV via the respective connecting link members 644, so that the rotating member 640 is rotated. Is rotated in the direction.

In this case, as described above, the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV is formed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the back side main body 642 (see FIGS. 57 and 58). That is, the engaged portion 641 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating member 640 formed in an annular shape. Therefore, the rotation amount of the rotation member 640 can be reduced with respect to the unit rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 (the rotation amount of the one-side rotation drive member 637 required to rotate the rotation member 640 by the unit rotation amount can be increased. ). Therefore, the apparent reduction gear ratio can be reduced accordingly. In other words, since the driving force is applied to a position far from the axis O of the rotating member 640, the rotating torque applied to the rotating member 640 can be increased. As a result, the rotary drive of the rotary member 640 (particularly the rotary drive from the stopped state) can be stabilized, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced.

Here, the drive mechanism 630 includes a one-side rotation drive member 637 and another-side rotation drive member 638, which are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53 ). The driving force applied from the mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 can be dispersed to different positions in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and uneven application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of dividing members DV can be suppressed. That is, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV in the circumferential direction as described above, the displacement (rotation) of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

Particularly, according to the present embodiment, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged at positions where the phases are different by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction of the rotation member 640 (see FIG. 53 ). The driving force from each of the rotary drive members 637 and 638 can be applied to the two most separated positions of the rotary member 640 (plurality of divided members DV), and as a result, the displacement (rotation) of the rotary member 640 can be prevented. Can be stabilized.

In this case, in the state of the division member DV, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 pivotally supported by the division member DV is inserted into the large diameter portion 621a of the connection link action groove 621 of the guide member 620. There are three kinds of state, the second state inserted into the small diameter portion 621b, and the third state inserted into the connecting portion 621c. In the present embodiment, the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other side. The rotation driving member 638 can apply a driving force to the divided member DV in the third state (that is, the engaging portions 637b and 638b can be engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the divided member DV in the third state). ).

Thereby, the driving force can be applied to the dividing member DV in a state where the distance between the adjacent dividing members DV is changed from the first distance to the second distance (or vice versa). Since the dividing member DV receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c, the rotation of the entire rotating member 640 in which a plurality of dividing members DV are connected endlessly (movement of each dividing member DV in the circumferential direction) is prevented. Although it is likely to become an obstructing portion, the plurality of dividing members DV are endless by directly driving the dividing member DV that receives a relatively large reaction force from the connecting portion 621c by the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638. The entire rotating member 640 connected to can be stably displaced (rotated).

The period during which the driving force is transmitted from the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 to the split member DV is completely the same as the period during which the split member DV is in the above-described third state. It is not necessary, and it is sufficient if the former driving force transmission period and the latter driving period in the third state are at least partially overlapped.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 are formed at positions having different phases. That is, when the dividing member DV is in the above-described third state, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 disposed in the dividing member DV is located at the large diameter portion 622a or the small diameter portion 622b of the undulating link action groove 622. Is inserted.

Therefore, when the division member DV is moved in the circumferential direction of the guide member 620, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 pivotally supported by the division member DV passes through the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621. After that, the insertion portion 648a of the undulating link member 648 passes through the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link action groove 622 (or vice versa).

Accordingly, the reaction force is not received from both the connecting portion 621c of the connecting link acting groove 621 and the connecting portion 622c of the undulating link acting groove 622 at the same time, and the time when the reaction force is received can be different. As a result, the required driving force can be dispersed, and the output required for the drive motor 631 of the drive mechanism 630 can be reduced accordingly.

Here, since the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged with their phases (rotational positions of the engaging portions 637b, 638b) different from each other, the displacement (rotation) of the rotation member 640. Can be stabilized. Here, the phase relationship between the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 75 is a state relationship diagram showing the relationship between the engagement state and the release state of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 with respect to the division member DV and the phase. In FIG. 75, the upper level relationship diagram corresponds to the one-side rotation drive member 637, and the lower level relationship diagram corresponds to the other-side rotation drive member 638. Further, in FIG. 75, the horizontal axis represents the phase and the vertical axis represents the engaged or disengaged state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 75, the first engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one-side rotation driving member 637 engages with the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV. If the phase at the time of starting is defined as 0° (reference position), the one-sided rotation driving member 637 will move to the first position until the phase reaches approximately 100° (that is, until it rotates 100° from the reference position). The engaging portion 637b of No. 1 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the dividing member DV and the driving force is transmitted to the dividing member DV, while the engagement is released while the phase is approximately 100° to 120°. Then, the transmission of the driving force to the dividing member DV is released.

After that, the second engaging portion 637b and the third engaging portion 637b of the engaging portions 637b formed at the three positions of the one side rotation drive member 637 are different from the case where the first engaging portion 637b. The same engagement and disengagement states (that is, engagement during a rotation angle of approximately 100° and release during a rotation angle of approximately 20°) are repeated.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 75, with respect to the other side rotation drive member 638, each of the engagement portions 638b formed at the three positions is the same as the engagement and release of the one side rotation drive member 637 described above. The state (that is, the engagement between the rotation angle of about 100° and the release during the rotation angle of about 20°) is repeated.

In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are arranged so that their phases (rotational positions of the mutual engaging portions 637b, 638b) are different. It That is, in the other side rotation drive member 638, the phase at which the first engaging portion 638b of the engaging portions 638b formed at the three positions thereof starts to engage with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, The first engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is set to a phase that is delayed by approximately 40° from the phase (reference position) at which the first engagement portion 637b starts engagement.

Accordingly, while one of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 is disengaged from the split member DV (that is, transmission of the driving force is released), the one side is released. The phases (rotational positions) of the engaging portions 637b and 638b are set so that the other of the rotary drive member 637 and the other side rotary drive member 638 engages with the split member DV. As a result, it is possible to prevent both of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 from simultaneously forming a state in which the engagement with the dividing member DV is released. As a result, it is possible to suppress the intermittent transmission of the driving force from the drive mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 and stabilize the displacement of the rotating member 640.

That is, as described above, in the configuration in which the rotating member 640 is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of dividing members DV, when the transmission of the driving force from the driving mechanism 630 to the rotating member 640 is intermittent, Due to the transmission and cancellation of the driving force, the interval between the division members DV is likely to be increased or decreased. Therefore, the posture of the rotating member 640 as a whole becomes unstable, and its displacement (rotation) becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, even if one of the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 is in the released state, the other is brought into the engaged state, and the driving force is applied to the rotation member 640. Since it is possible to form a state in which is transmitted at all times, it is possible to easily keep the interval between the division members DV constant. As a result, the posture of the rotating member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided members DV can be stabilized, and its displacement (rotation) can be stabilized.

Next, the operation of detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 is a state transition diagram of the rotation member 640 for each unit rotation amount, and illustrates a state in which the arrangements of the detection sensor 684 and the division member DV are developed in a straight line.

Note that, in FIG. 76, for convenience of description, the detection sensor 684 is shown with the reference signs “A to F”, and the dividing member DV is shown with the reference signs “1 to 10, 30”. The detection state is illustrated by the symbol "on, off". Further, in FIG. 76, the detected portion 641c is hatched for easy understanding.

Here, in the description of FIG. 76, the reference numerals “A to F” and “1 to 10, 30” given in the figure are used to indicate the respective detection sensors 684 as the detection sensor A, the detection sensor B,. , The detection sensor F, the division members DV are referred to as a first division member DV, a second division member DV,..., And a thirtieth division member DV to distinguish them from each other.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the rotating member 640 is rotated and the first dividing member DV reaches the phase (rotational position) detectable by the detection sensor A, the second dividing member DV moves to the sixth position. The division members DV are arranged in phases that can be detected by the detection sensors B to F, respectively.

Therefore, in the detection sensors A and C to F, the light received by the light receiving portion of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked by the detected portions 641c of the first division member DV and the third to sixth division members DV. Then, while the detection state is turned off, in the detection sensor B, the light emitted from the light emitting section can be received by the light receiving section, and the detection state is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 76( b ), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76( a ), the dividing member DV moves in the circumferential direction (FIG. 76( a) and FIG. 76( b )). Moving to the left), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one). Therefore, in the detection sensors B to E, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to seventh division members DV (detected portion 641c), while in the detection sensors A and F, the detection state is turned on. It

As shown in FIG. 76(c), when the rotating member 640 is rotated by a unit rotation amount from the state shown in FIG. 76(b), the division member DV to be detected by each of the detection sensors A to F is changed ( In the detection sensors A to D and F, the detection state is turned off by the light shielding of the third to sixth division members DV and the eighth division member DV (detected portion 641c), while the detection state is turned off. In the sensor E, the detection state is turned on.

After that, each time the rotating member 640 is rotated by the unit rotation amount, the division member DV which is the detection target of each of the detection sensors A to F is changed (shifted by one), and this is divided into the number of division members DV (this embodiment). When repeated for 30 times (that is, the rotating member 640 is rotated once), the state shown in FIG. 76A is restored.

In this case, as described above, there are two types of rotating members 640, one in which the detected portion 641c is formed and one in which the formation of the detected portion 641c is omitted. By connecting the two types of dividing members DV in the circumferential direction, the detected portions 641c are arranged in a predetermined arrangement with unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The predetermined arrangement means a combination of presence/absence of the detected portion 641c (that is, the detection sensor A even if any of the six division members DV adjacent to each other out of the 30 division members DV connected in the circumferential direction are taken out). To F detection states) means arrays that are different combinations.

Therefore, a table of such a combination (a table in which the detection states of the detection sensors A to F are associated with the division members DV to be detected at the time of detection) is created in advance and is stored in the ROM. The phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 can be grasped by referring to the table each time AF detects. That is, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of (30 in the present embodiment) dividing members DV is located at the reference position.

Here, a slit continuous in the circumferential direction is provided on the rotating member 640, the slit is detected by the detection sensor 684, and the pulse number of the pulse-shaped signal is cumulatively added, so that the cumulatively added pulse number is used. It is also possible to detect the rotation amount (phase) of the rotating member 640 from the reference position. However, in this case, if a detection failure occurs due to a light reception failure of the light receiving portion of the detection sensor 684, a difference occurs between the rotation amount of the rotating member 640 and the cumulative addition number of the pulses, and the phase of the rotating member 640 is accurate. Can not be detected. That is, even if the detection failure occurs even once, it affects the subsequent detection result, and the influence on the detection result is accumulated every time the detection failure occurs.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the plurality of detected portions 641c arranged at unequal intervals (predetermined arrangement) along the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640, and the movement of the plurality of detected portions 641c. Since the plurality of detection sensors 684 (detection sensors A to F) arranged on the locus are provided, the phase (rotational position) of the rotating member 640 is detected based on the combination of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F. be able to. That is, the phase of the rotating member 640 can be detected based on only the current detection result detected by the detecting sensors A to F, and the past of the detecting sensors A to F can be used to detect the phase of the rotating member 640. Therefore, even if a detection failure occurs in the past, it is not affected by the detection failure, and therefore the phase of the rotating member 640 can be accurately detected.

As described above, the interval between the detection sensors A to F is set to be the same as the interval (first interval) between the division members DV (detected portions 641c) in the first section S1 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, the combinations of the detection results of the detection sensors A to F can be changed every time the rotation member 640 is rotated by the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the division members DV. That is, the phase (rotational position) of the rotation member 640 can be detected with the rotation angle corresponding to the interval between the division members DV in the first section S1 as the minimum unit. As a result, the ball B is pitched from the pitching device 650 to any one of the plurality of divided members DV connected in the circumferential direction (that is, any pocket of the rotary member 640 simulating a roulette wheel). be able to.

Further, in this way, the disposition intervals of the detection sensors A to F are set based on the intervals of the division members DV in the first section S1 (that is, the detection sensors A to F are the division members DV in the first section S1. By disposing the detected part 641c in a position where it can be detected), the space required for disposing the detection sensors A to F is greater than that in the case where the distance between the division members DV in the second section S2 is used as a reference. Can be secured easily, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In other words, when the detection sensors A to F are arranged at the positions where the detected portion 641c of the division member DV can be detected in the second section S2, a space for arranging the detection sensors A to F is secured. Therefore, there is a limitation in narrowing the interval (second interval) between the division members DV. On the other hand, by disposing the detection sensors A to F on the first section S1 side, there is no restriction on the setting of the interval (second interval) of the division members DV in the second section S2, and the second The two intervals can be narrower. As a result, the space required for disposing the rotating member 640 can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the six detection sensors 684 respectively perform two (on/off) detection results based on the presence/absence of the detected portion 641c of the division member DV, 64(= 2 6) combinations can be formed.

In this case, since the number of divided members DV provided is 30, it is sufficient to have five detection sensors 684 (that is, 32 (=2 to the 5th power) combinations can be formed). However, in this case, a state in which all the detection results of the five detection sensors 684 are turned off (not shielded by the detected portion 641c) occurs, so at a predetermined phase (rotational position) corresponding to the state. , The timing of acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, by using the six detection sensors 684 as in the present embodiment, all the detection sensors 684 of the six detection sensors 684 turn off the detection result (a state in which light is not shielded by the detected portion 641c). ) Can be avoided. In other words, in at least one detection sensor 684 among the six detection sensors 684, the detection result can be turned on (light is shielded by the detected portion 641), and therefore all phases (rotation) Position), the timing for acquiring the detection result of the detection sensor 684 can be obtained.

FIG. 77 is a partially enlarged side view in which a portion of the rotating member 640 in the first section S1 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 77, in the first section S1, in the display plate 646 of the division member DV, the plate portion 646a is arranged in the horizontal posture and the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a (FIGS. 57 and 58). The side surface (left side in FIG. 77) opposite to the reference side) faces the side surface of the plate holding member 645 of the adjacent division member DV.

In the present embodiment, the display plate 646 is formed such that the side surface of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b is curved in an arc shape (see the enlarged portion in FIG. 77). Therefore, when the plate portion 646a is rotated about the shaft portion 646b and arranged in a horizontal posture, the display plate 646 has a plate holding member 645 of the adjacent division member DV on the side opposite to the shaft portion 646b of the plate portion 646a. Can be suppressed, and as a result, the distance between the side of the plate portion 646a opposite to the shaft portion 646b (arc-shaped side surface) and the side surface of the plate holding member 645 can be narrowed.

As a result, in the first section S1, when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of narrowing the interval (first interval) between them, the plate portion 646a of the display plate 646 is moved. By bringing the side surface into contact with the side surface of the plate holding member 645, such relative displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the division members DV from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the distance between them, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

On the other hand, in the first section S1, the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 has a terminal end of the connection link opening 642a in the back side main body 642 of the adjacent division member DV (an end portion on one side in the extending direction, FIG. 73(a)). ) Lower side) (see FIG. 73(a)), when the dividing member DV and the adjacent dividing member DV try to relatively displace in the direction of widening the distance (first distance) between them, By inserting the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 into contact with the end of the connection link opening 642a, such phase displacement can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detected portions 641c of the division members DV from being displaced in the direction of increasing the distance therebetween, and as a result, it is possible to improve the detection accuracy of the detection sensor 684.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the tip of the first passage forming member 520 is always open has been described, but the left swing unit 2500 in the second embodiment is arranged at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. , A tip wall member 2560 for opening and closing the passage. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an exploded front perspective view of the left swing unit 2500 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 78 illustrates a state in which the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

As shown in FIG. 78, the left swing unit 2500 includes a base member 2510 that discharges a sphere to the right rear side of the first wall portion 513 in a front view, an extending direction of the distribution base member 2521, and an elongated hole 2521d. It is mainly configured to include a first passage forming member 2520 whose extension direction is substantially linear and a tip wall member 2560 which opens and closes the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

The base member 2510 includes a lateral flow-down passage 2515 extending rearward from the right side of the guide wall portion 513a. Although the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 is different from the outer shape of the introduction cylindrical portion 552 in the first embodiment, the technical idea thereof is the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted in this embodiment.

The lateral flow-down passage 2515 is a passage for discharging the ball that has reached the first wall portion 513 when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

The first passage forming member 2520 includes a distribution base member 2521 and a passage cover member 2522. The distribution base member 2521 includes a long plate-shaped hanging plate portion 2521a that forms one side of a ball flow passage, a long hole 2521d that extends along the extending direction of the hanging plate portion 2521a, and a gap V1. Second distribution convex portion 2521g arranged to face the distribution convex portion 521e on the right side in front view, and the rear side toward the front side of the hanging plate part on the right side in front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And a discharge recess 2521h recessed from the side surface.

The hanging plate portion 2521a has a recessed portion 2521a2 in which a portion of the lower wall surface facing the passage cover member 2522 (left side in FIG. 78) is cut and recessed at the lower end portion, and the passage cover member at the lower end portion. A shaft support hole 2521a3, which is formed in a circular shape in the direction opposite to the passage cover member, is provided on the side opposite to 2522.

The recessed portion 2521a2 is a recessed portion that forms an opening on the lower surface of the first passage forming member 2520 in cooperation with the recessed portion 2522b1 of the passage cover member 2522. The tip wall member 2560 passes through the opening formed by the recessed portion 2521a by the rotating operation.

The shaft support hole 2521a3 is a hole in which the main body 2561a of the tip wall member 2560 is supported by a pin member on the rod, and is arranged at a position (coaxial position) corresponding to the shaft support hole 2522a2 of the passage cover member 2522. It

The 2nd distribution convex part 2521g is a part comprised by substantially the same shape as the distribution convex part 521e, and is a part which distributes the sphere which reached|attained the 1st wall part 513 right and left. The discharge concave portion 2521h is arranged with a space larger than the diameter of the sphere between itself and the first wall portion 513, reaches the first wall portion 513, and moves to the right side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g in front view. The distributed balls are introduced into the lateral flow-down passage 2515 from the discharge recess 2521h and then discharged to the outside of the game area.

The passage cover member 2522 is a plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 2522a that is provided on the front side of the distribution base member 2521, and a plate-shaped portion that extends from both ends in the lateral direction of the plate-shaped portion 2522a toward the back side. The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 2522a includes the ball receiving portion 522a1 described above in the first embodiment, and a shaft support hole 2522a2 formed in a circular shape coaxially with the shaft support hole 2521a3 of the distribution base member 2521 at the lower end. Prepare The shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 are holes that rotatably support the tip wall member 2560.

The upper and lower wall portions 2522b are provided with a recessed portion 2522b1 which is recessed at a position facing the recessed portion 2521a2 and which forms an opening through which a ball can pass in cooperation with the recessed portion 2521a2.

The tip end wall member 2560 is disposed between the distribution base member 2521 and the passage cover member 2522 at the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and rotates into a rod-shaped pin member coaxial with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2. A main body member 2561 that is substantially Z-shaped in a front view and is rotatably supported, and a torsion spring 2562 that biases the main body member 2561 clockwise in a front view are mainly provided.

The torsion spring 2562 is configured such that one arm is fixed to the tip of the passage cover member 2522, and the other arm abuts on the locking pin 2561e projecting from the tip wall member 2560 to the back side.

The main body member 2561 of the front end wall member 2560 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. 79A and 79D are front views of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560, and FIG. 79B is a top view of the main body member 2561 of the tip wall member 2560. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the main body member 2561 of the distal end wall member 2560 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 79B. 79(a) and 79(d), the shape of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 79(a), the first passage forming member 2520 has the release position ( 80 (see FIG. 80) is shown, and in FIG. 79(d), the first passage forming member 2520 is shown at the connecting position (see FIG. 81).

As shown in FIG. 79, the main body member 2561 of the front end wall member 2560 includes a cylindrical main body portion 2561a that is axially supported coaxially with the shaft support holes 2521a3 and 2522a2 (see FIG. 78), and a radial direction from the main body portion 2561a. The plate-shaped plate portion 2561b formed in a straight line, the downflow hole 2561c formed in the thickness direction of the plate portion 2561b with a diameter equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the body portion 2561a of the plate portion 2561b on the opposite side. A curved wall portion 2561d extending from an end portion of the main body portion 2561a along an arc, and a tip of the curved wall portion 2561d protruding in parallel with the axial direction of the main body portion 2561a. 2561e and a pushing portion 2561f which is a portion disposed on the opposite side of the curved wall portion 2561d with the main body member 2561a as a boundary and which is formed in a shape smaller than the opening of the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520. Prepare mainly.

The plate portion 2561b is formed such that the length of the main body portion 2561a in the radial direction (the length in the extending direction) is longer than the dimension of the opening at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 80). It Accordingly, the rotation stop position of the tip end wall member 2560 in the biasing direction of the torsion spring 2562 (see FIG. 78) can be set to a position where the plate portion 2561b and the upper and lower wall portions 2522b abut (FIG. 78). 79(d)).

In the released state (see FIG. 79(d)), the curved wall portion 2561d stops the flow of the ball by colliding the ball with the contact wall 2561d1 arranged to face the ball flowing down the first passage forming member 2520. On the other hand, in the connected state, the ball passes through the first passage forming member 2520 to allow the ball to pass therethrough, and the ball that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c is arranged on the back side of the contact wall 2561d1. By rolling on 2561d2, it has the role of smoothing the subsequent flow-down.

Next, the operation of the left swing unit 2500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. 80 to 82 are front views of the left swing unit 2500. 80 to 82, the cover member 550 is not shown, and in FIG. 80, the first passage forming member 2520 is shown in the release position, and in FIG. 81, from FIG. The state where the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in the front view is shown, and in FIG. 82, the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connecting position is shown. Further, in FIGS. 80 to 82, the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated by the outline of the hanging plate portion 2521a at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the release position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the right side in the front view of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. And is retained between the discharge recess 2521h and the first wall portion 513, the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the discharge recess 2521h is disposed on the front side of the sideward flow passage 2515. This allows the ball to flow down the sideward flow passage 2515, and the ball is discharged to the outside of the game area. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the balls from being supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 in the state where the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 80, the sphere introduced into the discharge recess 2521h stays in the discharge recess 2521h until the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, so that a ball coming next may enter the discharge recess 2521h. This can be prevented, and the next sphere can be retained outside the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80).

The first passage forming member 2520 rotates clockwise in a front view, and the second distribution convex portion 2521g guides the sphere that is retained outside the rotation trajectory of the tip of the second distribution convex portion 2521g (upper side in FIG. 80). By being arranged at a position along the right wall portion of the wall portion 513a, it is introduced to the left side of the second distribution convex portion 2521g and supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. It With this, even if a plurality of balls reach the first wall portion 513 in the state shown in FIG. 80, it is possible to keep only one ball introduced into the discharge recess 2521h.

As shown in FIG. 80, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the release position, the first passage forming member 2520 is formed from the base end portion (left end portion in FIG. 80) toward the distal end portion (right end portion in FIG. 80). The member 2520 is configured to be inclined upward. Therefore, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated with the sphere supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 remaining and the state shown in FIG. Flows toward the base end due to the action of gravity, so that the ball can be prevented from falling from the tip end.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the first passage forming member 2520 is in the state between the release position and the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the second distribution convex. Riding on the tip of the portion 2521g, the flow is stopped. Accordingly, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged in the state between the release position and the connecting position, the sphere is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522. Can be prevented.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the first passage forming member 2520 is inclined downward toward the tip end portion. Therefore, when the opening at the tip is always open, when the sphere remains between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522 and is brought into the state shown in FIG. 81, May fall from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and the ball may be caught in another unit (rotating unit 600 or the like (see FIG. 5)) and cause malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the distal end wall member 2560 is arranged in the opening of the distal end portion of the first passage forming member 2520, and the curved wall portion 2561d functions as a lid of the opening, so that the ball Can be reliably prevented from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the first passage forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position, the sphere that has flowed down from the game area and reached the first wall portion 513 is the front view left of the second distribution convex portion 2521g. To the front side through the gap V1 (see FIG. 78), is supplied between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, and extends in the extending direction of the first passage forming member 2520. Run down along.

At the connecting position, the push-in portion 2561f of the tip wall member 2560 and the wall surface of the housing recess 422f of the drive-side slide member 420 contact (the wall surface of the housing recess 422f is disposed on the displacement locus of the push-in portion 2561f), and the tip end. The curved wall portion 2561d of the wall member 2560 is rotated in the direction in which the curved wall portion 2561d is projected to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520 (counterclockwise in FIG. 82). That is, since the rotation of the tip wall member 2560 is caused by the change in the position of the first passage forming member 2520, the driving force of the tip wall member 2560 can also be used as the driving force of the first passage forming member 2520. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

At this time, in the connecting position, the tip wall member 2560 is rotated to the posture in which the plate portion 2561b is in the surface position with respect to the upper and lower wall portions 2522b, so that the sphere that has reached the tip portion of the first passage forming member 2520 is smoothed. The ball can be thrown into the downflow hole 2561c (without bouncing as in the case where a step is formed between the upper and lower wall portions 2522b and the plate portion 2561b).

The sphere that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c is guided to the sensor member 422c of the drive side slide member 420 by rolling on the rolling wall 2561d2 of the curved wall portion 2561d. That is, the curved wall portion 2561d has a role of stopping the sphere that has reached the tip of the first passage forming member 2520, and a role of guiding the sphere that has passed through the downflow hole 2561c and has been fed from the first passage forming member 2520. , Is also used.

At the connecting position (see FIG. 82 ), the plate portion 2561 b is in the surface position with the lower wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522 b (see FIG. 78) of the passage cover member 2522, so before reaching the connecting position. The plate portion 2561b is in a state of entering inside (upper side in FIG. 82) of the lower wall portion of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. That is, the ball can pass through the downflow hole 2561c only after reaching the connecting position (a state in which the ball is stopped by the curved wall portion 2561d is ensured until reaching the connecting position).

Accordingly, even if the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated toward the release position from the coupling position in the state where the balls remain inside the first passage forming member 2520, the balls still have the tip of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to reliably prevent it from falling off. This is maintained even when a plurality of balls are sent in series.

A case will be described with reference to FIG. 83 in which a plurality of balls are continuously sent to the first passage forming member 2520. 83(a) to 83(c) are partial front views of the left swing unit 2500 and the liquid crystal elevating/lowering unit 400. 83(a) to 83(c), the spherical passages of the first passage forming member 2520 and the second passage forming member 422 are partially cross-sectioned, and in FIG. 83(a), the first passage is formed. A state in which the forming member 2520 is arranged at the connection position is illustrated. In FIG. 83(b), the first passage forming member 2520 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 83(a). In the state shown in FIG. 83(c), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 83(b) and the tip wall member 2560 is partitioned by rotation. The closed state is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 83A to 83C, a sphere that flows down continuously from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is illustrated as an example.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), the push-in portion 2561f is in contact with the accommodation recess 422f in the connected state, and is provided with a recessed portion 2561f1 on the lower side in FIG. 83(a) starting from the contact position. The recessed portion 2561f1 is recessed on the shaft support portion 516 side with respect to the arc C21 centered on the shaft support portion 516 (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83A, as the first passage forming member 2520 rotates, the tip end wall member 2560 starts to rotate due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 2562. In FIG. 83(a), the sphere arranged on the right side across the curved wall portion 2561d is a feed ball P21, and the sphere arranged on the left side is a residual sphere P22.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), when the first passage forming member 2520 starts to rotate, the tip wall member 2560 rotates, so that the curved wall portion 2561d enters inside the upper and lower wall portions 2522b. As a result, the residual sphere P22 is brought into contact with the contact wall 2561d, and the flow of the residual sphere P22 is stopped.

On the other hand, since the feed ball P21 is disposed on the right side of the curved wall portion 2561d, it does not stop flowing down by the contact wall 2561d and passes through the downflow hole 2561c to the outside of the first passage forming member 2520. It is possible to send a ball.

In this case, the feed ball P21 may be lifted to the upper end of the curved wall portion 2561d (see FIG. 83(b)), but the upper wall portions of the upper and lower wall portions 2522b are arranged to face each other in the moving direction of the curved wall portion 2561d. Therefore, by pushing the feed ball P21 by the wall portion, it is possible to ensure that the feed ball P21 passes through the downflow hole 2561c. As a result, the diameter of the opening of the downflow hole 2561c can be suppressed to the same extent as the diameter of the sphere, and the downflow path of the sphere flowing down the downflow hole 2561c can be stabilized.

As shown in FIG. 83(c), from the state shown in FIG. 83(b), the first passage forming member 2520 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 83(c), and the curved wall portion 2561d of the drive side slide member 420 is moved. Even if the feed ball P21 remains on the curved wall portion 2561d side when it is moved above the curved wall portion 422f1, the rolling wall 2561d2 functions as a portion for rolling the feed ball P21, and the rolling wall The feed ball P21 is made to flow down while the distance between the lower end of 2561d2 and the upper end of the curved wall portion 422f1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the ball (the first passage is formed until the feed ball P21 is partitioned down). By stopping the member 2520 at the position of FIG. 83(c) or slowing the speed in the vicinity of FIG. 83(c), it is possible to ensure that the ball flows down from the first passage forming member 2520 to the second passage forming member 422. can do.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the driven side slide member 430 has been described, but the liquid crystal lifting unit 3400 in the third embodiment displays the third symbol. The device 81 is arranged to the left of the driven-side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

84 to 88 are front views of the liquid crystal elevating/lowering unit 3400 according to the third embodiment, which shows the elevating/lowering operations of the driving side slide member 420 and the driven side slide member 3430 in chronological order. 84 to 88, the left and right members of the cover member 470 are not shown, and the vicinity of the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 are partially enlarged.

84 illustrates the rack 452 of the transmission device 450 immediately after contacting the driven-side slide member 3430. In FIG. 85, the rack 452 is moved upward from the state illustrated in FIG. 84 to drive-side slide member 420. 87 and a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, and FIG. 86 shows a state in which only the drive side slide member 420 is moved down from the state of FIG. 85 and arranged in the lowered position. 86, the driven-side slide member 3430 is dropped from the state shown in FIG. 88 shows a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further rotated by a predetermined amount, and FIG. 88 shows a state in which the driven side slide member 3430 is further dropped from the state shown in FIG. 87 and the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged in the lowered position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, the liquid crystal elevating unit 3400 includes a base member 410, a drive side slide member 420, a driven side slide member 3430, a drive device 440, a transmission device 450, and a lower front side. A plate agent 460, a cover member 470, and a solenoid 3480 that is disposed on the front side of the cover member 470 and that operates in a mode that prevents the driven-side slide member 3430 from falling are mainly provided.

In the base member 410, the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 are arranged only on the left side portion in front view, and the disposition of the right side portion in front view is omitted.

The driven-side slide member 3430 includes a main body member 3431 that is long in the left-right direction and that has the third symbol display device 81 at a position eccentric to the left in the front view from the left-right center position, and the left-right direction of the main body member 3431. The functional portion 432 arranged at both ends, the guide hole 433 which is a hole vertically formed in the functional portion 432 and into which the guide rod 451 is inserted, and the lower end portion of the functional portion 432 is raised in the left-right outward direction. A hook-shaped portion 434 that extends obliquely, and a fall prevention portion 435 that extends to the back side inside the guide hole 433 at the upper end of the functional portion 432 (on the side close to the other guide hole 433), Is mainly equipped.

The main body member 3431 includes a locking projection 3431a that is provided at the upper end thereof so as to project leftward in front view. The locking projection 3431a is a part that is locked by a solenoid 3480 arranged on the front side of the cover member 470 and is prevented from falling. The upper surface of the locking projection 3431a is inclined downward as it extends toward the tip in the projecting direction.

The solenoid 3480 includes a rod member 3481 that can be projected and retracted to the right when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the rod member 3481 is inclined upward toward the tip in the projecting direction. Note that the solenoid 3480 is in a retracted state when energized and is in an extended state when not energized, and in this extended state, the tip of the rod member 3481 is extended to the left and right center side from the tip of the locking projection 3431a. Composed of.

As shown in FIG. 84, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side in front view. As a result, while securing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the regions that were divided into the left and right of the third symbol display device 81 are collected at one location (on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 84), By configuring as a large area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the size of the movable member that can be arranged in the empty area.

Since the third symbol display device 81 is arranged closer to the left side when viewed from the front, the load applied from the driven-side slide member 420 to the rack 452 is asymmetric (left side is larger). Since the left and right racks 452 are connected by the drive-side slide member 420, the asymmetry of the load on the rack 452 tends to incline the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the wiring storage member 423 is disposed at the lower left end of the second passage forming member 422 as viewed from the front. At this time, the center of gravity G31 of the wiring housing member 423 is arranged to the left of the center position of the driving-side slide member 420, so that the weight of the wiring housing member 423 and the wiring housed in the wiring housing member 423 causes the driving side to move. The slide member 420 may be loaded and may tilt counterclockwise as viewed from the front.

In this way, the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are easily tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that rattling during the lifting operation of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 is prevented. It is possible to limit rattling between a state in which 452 maintains a horizontal posture (see FIG. 87) and a state in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise when viewed from the front (drive-side slide). It is possible to prevent the member 420 and the rack 452 from inclining clockwise from the front when viewed from the horizontal position.

Therefore, while the lowering restricting member 415 and the ascending restricting member 417 arranged on the left side in the front view effectively suppress the inclination of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452, they guide the up-and-down operation of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452. To do. On the other hand, since the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are not inclined to the right side in front view, it is not necessary to dispose the descending regulation member 415 and the elevation regulation member 417 on the outside of the functional portion 432 on the right side in front view. The cost (material cost and assembly man-hour) can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driving side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the wiring housing member 423 rises as compared with the state shown in FIG. 84, and its center of gravity G31 is compared with the state shown in FIG. And moved to the left when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the load in the direction in which the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 are tilted counterclockwise as viewed from the front becomes large, and the meshing relationship between the rack 452 and the drive gear 442 may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the state in which the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the raised position, the protruding plate 453a is brought into contact with and supported by the lowering regulation member 415. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the postures of the drive-side slide member 420 and the rack 452 from being tilted counterclockwise in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 85, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, the locking projection 3431 rides over the rod member 3482 of the solenoid 3480, and the locking projection 3431 is placed on the rod member 3482. ..

At this time, the bar member 3481 is pushed in the left-right direction along the inclination of the upper surface of the locking projection 3431, so that the locking projection 3431 can get over the bar member 3481. Accordingly, the locking protrusion 3431 can be placed on the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480 without conducting electricity to the solenoid 3480.

As shown in FIG. 86, even if the drive-side slide member 420 is lowered in a state where the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged in the raised position, the rod member 3482 of the solenoid 3480 causes the locking convex portion 3431a of the driven-side slide member 3430. By supporting the driven side slide member 3430, the driven side slide member 3430 is prevented from moving downward in conjunction with the drive side slide member 420, and the driven side slide member 3430 is maintained in the raised position.

At this time, the driven side slide member 3430 is arranged at a position where the third symbol display device 81 is closer to the left side in front view from the center position, and the center of gravity is closer to the left side, so that the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side. Also, the driven-side slide member 3430 can be prevented from falling.

That is, when the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 is at the center in the left-right direction, the driven side slide member 3430 may sway clockwise or counterclockwise in front view due to vibration or the like. If the driven-side slide member 3430 tilts clockwise when viewed from the front when the solenoid 3480 is only on the left side, the locking projection 3431a may slip off the rod member 3481.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the center of gravity of the driven-side slide member 3430 is located closer to the left side in front view, the driven-side slide member 3430 tilts clockwise from the horizontal position (see FIG. 87) due to vibration or the like. Is suppressed.

Therefore, the locking protrusion 3431a is likely to tilt in the direction of approaching the rod member 3481 of the solenoid 3480, and the contact between the locking protrusion 3431a and the rod member 3481 is maintained. It is restrained from falling off.

Therefore, the driven-side slide member 3430 can be stably maintained in the raised position without disposing the solenoids 3480 on both sides of the driven-side slide member 3430 in the left-right direction, and the number of solenoids 3480 to be installed can be reduced. The operation of the driven-side slide member 3430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the solenoid 3480 is energized and the rod member 3481 is in the retracted state, the driven side slide member 3430 falls. In the process in which the driven-side slide member 3430 falls, the positions of the hook-shaped portion 434 and the lowering regulation member 415 are displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the hook-shaped portion 434 is caught in the lowering regulation member 415 and malfunction occurs. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 87, the hook-shaped portion 434 is dropped while being in contact with the separated inclined portion 417f of the lift restricting member 417, thereby rotating the lift restricting member 417 outwardly (counterclockwise in FIG. 87) ( Release state).

As shown in FIG. 88, when the driven-side slide member 3430 is arranged in the lowered position, the lift restricting member 417 is rotated inward (clockwise in FIG. 88), and the engaging claw portion 417e of the lift restricting member 417, The hook-shaped part 434 is arranged to face each other in the vertical direction (engaged state).

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, since the rising restricting member 417 is rotated with respect to the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430, the state changes from the released state to the engaged state, so that the posture does not change. The load and posture change amount required to change the released state and the engaged state compared to the case where the engagement state is changed by changing the released state and the engaged state by the elasticity of the member. be able to. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement state in which the hook-shaped portion 434 of the driven-side slide member 3430 and the lift restricting member 417 are engaged with each other.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the rising regulating member 417 is rotated by the drop of the driven-side slide member 3430. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving device to form the engagement state of the lift restricting member 417. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the facing wall portion 422f2 projects from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b of the connecting member 424 at the lower tilt position, but the drive-side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment is curved. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 arranged to face the wall portion 422f1 is configured as a planar wall portion extending in the up-down direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

89(a) is a partial front view of the drive side slide member 4420 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 89(b) is a side view of the drive side slide member 4420 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89(a). 89C is a partial front view of the drive-side slide member 4420. 89(a) and 89(c), the drive-side slide member 4420 is cross-sectionally viewed at the center position of the connecting member 4424 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 89(a)). 89(a) and 89(b) show the connection member 4424 in a downwardly inclined state, and FIG. 89(c) shows the connection member 4424 in an upwardly inclined state.

The connecting member 4424 includes an extending claw portion 4424f extending from the lower end portion of the upper side wall portion 424b to the right in front view.

The extended claw portion 4424f is disposed so as to face the curved wall portion 422f1 in the upward inclined state, is concavely curved in a direction away from the curved wall portion 422f1, and is also in the front-rear direction (FIG. 89) as shown in FIG. 89(b). (B) A pair of recessed portions are provided in the middle portion in the left-right direction.

The second passage forming member 4422 includes a facing wall portion 4422f2 arranged to face the curved wall portion 422f1. The opposing wall portion 4422f2 is a plate portion that extends vertically along the opening of the sensor member 422c, and the recessed portion is arranged in a manner that does not interfere with the extending claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 of FIG. In the state, it is extended to a position where it overlaps with the extended claw portion 4424f.

According to the present embodiment, in the downward tilted state shown in FIG. 89(a), since there is no portion (projection portion or the like) that is damaged by the collision of the ball in the path of the ball, the first passage forming member is provided. When a ball is sent from 520 to the connection member 4424, it is possible to prevent the member from being damaged by colliding with the ball.

In the upwardly inclined state shown in FIG. 89(b), the extending claw portion 4424f and the opposing wall portion 4422f2 guide the sphere, so that the sphere can be prevented from being clogged near the sensor member 422c.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the upper end portion (the radially outer portion of the distribution convex portion 521e) of the first passage forming member 520 of the left swing unit 500 is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the cover member that covers the open portion of the upper end portion of the first passage forming member 520 opens the side to which the sphere is supplied and the side to which the sphere is supplied in the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e. The opposite side may operate in a lidd manner. In this case, foreign matter other than spheres can be prevented from entering the left and right regions of the distribution convex portion 521e.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the connecting member 424 is in contact with the first passage forming member 520 and rotated is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the connection member 424 may be omitted. In this case, the product cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts required for connecting the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422. Further, instead of the connecting member 424, a rubber-like elastic body having an internal passage may be arranged. In this case, the positional deviation between the first passage forming member 520 and the second passage forming member 422 is absorbed by the deformation of the shape of the rubber-like elastic body due to the contact of the first passage forming member 520 with the rubber-like elastic body. be able to.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the drive-side slide member 420 is driven by the single-layer rack 452 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rack for driving the drive-side slide member 420 is composed of front and rear two layers, and a case where the drive-side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the front rack and a case where the drive-side slide member 420 is vertically moved by the rear rack. And may be configurable. In this case, when only one of the two layers of racks comes into contact with the driven-side slide member 430 in the vertical direction, the drive-side slide member 420 and the driven-side slide member 430 move up and down in cooperation with each other. It is possible to switch between the case where the drive-side slide member 420 passes through the driven-side slide member 430 and is vertically moved independently.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b are projected to the outside of the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, one of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b may be recessed toward the center side with respect to the circle formed by the roots of the other gear teeth, and the other may be extended correspondingly.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the portion that abuts the abutting portion 351b is the adjacent gear tooth 354c having a gear tooth shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion having a shape different from the gear tooth shape may be formed, and the portion and the contact portion 351b may be in contact with each other.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the portion that comes into surface contact with the contact portion 351b is the receiving portion 354b in which the tooth shape is not formed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear tooth of the tooth-shaped portion may be partially shaved to form a surface that comes into contact with the contact portion 351b.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the entire overlapping portion of the contact portion 351b and the receiving portion 354b is in contact with the surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by providing a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rotation shaft at an intermediate position of the contact portion 351b or the receiving portion 354b, the area to be faced may be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the left and right lift restricting members 417 contact the drive-side slide member 420 at the same timing has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the left and right lift regulating members 417 may be brought into contact with the drive side slide member 420. In this case, a left-right asymmetric load can be applied to the drive-side slide member 420, and the drive-side slide member 420 can be prevented from tilting even when the center of gravity of the drive-side slide member 420 is closer to the left or right (one of the left and right). Can be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tip wall member 2560 is provided at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode in which an air blower that blows air from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 toward the base end side is arranged, or a mode in which a magnetic force generator is provided at the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 to attract spheres by magnetic force. Alternatively, a mode may be adopted in which the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 is vibrated in the rotation direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520.

In the second embodiment, the case where the first passage forming member 2520 inclines upward toward the tip side in the released state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an intermediate portion that sinks between the base end portion and the tip end portion of the first passage forming member 2520 may be provided (it may be configured in a U shape). In this case, when the sphere remains inside the first passage forming member 2520 in the released state, the sphere can be retained in the intermediate portion (the position closer to the tip end side than the base end portion), so that the communication state changes. In doing so, it is possible to shorten the period from the tip of the first passage forming member 2520 until the ball is delivered.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the descending regulation member 415 and the elevation regulation member 417 are arranged on one side has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of lowering regulation members 415 and rising regulation members 417 are arranged on the left and right of the base member 410, and the elastic coefficients of the torsion springs 415d and 417g for urging the lowering regulation members 415 and the rising regulation members 417 are set to the left side. The torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged may be different from the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged on the right side. At this time, as compared with the torsion springs 415d and 417g arranged on the left side in the front view (the side on which the center of gravity of the driven side slide member 3430 approaches), the elasticity of the torsion springs 415d, 417g arranged on the right side in the front view. It is preferable to reduce the coefficient. In this case, the load for changing the posture of the driven-side slide member 3430 in the counterclockwise direction in the front view (the direction in which the driven-side slide member 3430 is tilted due to the deviation of the center of gravity) by the lowering regulating member 415 and the raising regulating member 417 arranged on the right side is While restraining, when the driven-side slide member 3430 changes its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front due to the abrupt vertical movement of the driven-side slide member 3430, the posture change can be suppressed.

In the third embodiment, the case where the driven-side slide member 430 is dropped after the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged in the lowered position has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the driven-side slide member 430 may be dropped while the drive-side slide member 420 is arranged at the intermediate position. In this state, the drive-side slide member 420 may be controlled in a mode in which the drive-side slide member 430 is operated in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the driven-side slide member 430 (control for repeatedly switching between the ascending operation and the descending operation). In this case, the drive-side slide member 420 can produce an effect of causing the driven-side slide member 430 to bounce (repeat repeatedly).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the split member DV in which the insertion portion 644a of the connection link member 644 is inserted into the connection portion 621c of the connection link action groove 621 is separated by the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638. Although the case of driving has been described, the invention is not limited to this. The insertion member 644a of the connecting link member 644 is inserted into the large-diameter portion 621a of the connecting link action groove 621, and the dividing member DV is moved to one side. It may be driven by the rotary drive member 637 and the other side rotary drive member 638. In this case, the distance between the dividing member DV that applies the driving force and the adjacent dividing member DV is increased, so that the adjacent dividing member DV and the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the other-side rotation driving member 638 are provided. Can be suppressed, and the diameters of the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the drive torque applied from the one-side rotation driving member and the other-side rotation driving member to the split member DV (rotating member 640) can be increased.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the period in which the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV and the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 are the division member. Although the case where the period in which the DV is engaged with the driven portion 641 overlaps has been described (see FIG. 75 ), it is not necessarily limited to this, and the engagement portion 637 b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 or another portion. While one of the engaging portions 638b of the side rotation driving member 638 is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV, the other is disengaged and the engaging portion of the one side rotation driving member 637 is engaged. One of the engagement portions 638b of the other side rotation drive member 638 may be disengaged while the other is engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the split member DV.

In this case, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 from being simultaneously engaged with the engaged portions 641 of the split members DV respectively. .. That is, the engagement portion 637b of the one-side rotation drive member 637 or the engagement portion 638b of the other-side rotation drive member 638 can be alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641. Thereby, the displacement of the rotating member 640 can be stabilized.

That is, a phase shift occurs between the one-side rotation drive member 637 and the other-side rotation drive member 638 due to dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, drive tolerance of the drive motor 631, and the like. In the rotary member 640 formed by endlessly connecting the DVs, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotary drive member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotary drive member 638 are simultaneously engaged with the divided member DV. When the phase shift occurs in the state of being engaged with the portion 641, one section in the circumferential direction of the rotating member 640 is in a compressed state and the other section is in a pulled state, so that the displacement of the rotating member 640 is unstable. Becomes

On the other hand, as described above, the engaging portion 637b of the one-side rotation driving member 637 and the engaging portion 638b of the other-side rotation driving member 638 are alternately engaged with the engaged portion 641 of the division member DV. By doing so, even if the phase shift occurs, it is possible to prevent the rotary member 640 from being affected by the phase shift. As a result, even if the rotating member 640 is formed by connecting a plurality of division members DV endlessly, the displacement can be stabilized.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the division members DV are connected endlessly in the rotation unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the division members DV are connected endlessly (from one end to the other end). It is, of course, possible to connect the dividing members DV up to and including one end and the other end. In this case, for example, the division members DV endlessly connected may be displaced (moved) along the endless track in each of the above-described embodiments, or the divided members DV may be moved along the endless track. The division members DV connected in an end shape may be reciprocally displaced (reciprocating movement).

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Structure In which the Rotation of the Second Gear 352 is Restricted by the Locking Arc 351c>
In a gaming machine provided with a drive means, a transmission member for transmitting the drive force of the drive means, and a displacement member displaced between an ascending position and a descending position by the drive force transmitted by the transmitting member. The member includes a first gear and a second gear that is meshed with the first gear and that is disposed on the displacement member side in the driving force transmission path with respect to the first gear. The gear has an abutting portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the raised position, the abutting portion of the first gear has a predetermined tooth of the second gear. By contacting, rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted, and the gaming machine A1.

Here, a gaming machine provided with a drive means, a transmission member that transmits the drive force of the drive means, and a displacement member that is displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the drive force transmitted by the transmission member. Are known. For example, the transmission member is formed by a rack-and-pinion mechanism, the rotation of the pinion driven by the drive means is converted into a linear motion of the rack, and the displacement member is moved up and down between the lowered position and the raised position by the linear motion of the rack. There is one (Patent Document 1: JP 2012-80941 A, for example). In this case, when the driving force of the driving means is released in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. Therefore, it is necessary to continue to apply the driving force of the driving means, and there is a problem that energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position increases. On the other hand, by providing a crank mechanism in a part of the driving means and utilizing the dead point of the crank mechanism, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the displacement member is prevented from being lowered from its raised position by its own weight. Although a structure is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-140602), in this case, there is a problem that the entire transmission member becomes large due to the interposition of the crank mechanism.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the first gear has the abutment portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and the abutment of the first gear is provided in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position. The rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is regulated by contacting the predetermined teeth of the second gear with the portion, so that even if the driving force of the drive means is released, the displacement member will not move. It is possible to suppress lowering due to its own weight. Therefore, energy consumption when holding the displacement member in the raised position can be suppressed. Further, since the structure for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be formed by the first gear and the second gear, and it is not necessary to separately provide the crank mechanism, the transmission member can be downsized. it can.

In the gaming machine A1, the second gear is provided with a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and in a state where the displacement member is arranged in a raised position, the second gear is provided at the contact portion of the first gear. The game machine A2, wherein the rotation of the second gear in a direction in which the displacement member moves upward is restricted by abutting the receiving portions of the two gears.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, when the receiving portion of the second gear is brought into contact with the abutting portion of the first gear, the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises. Is restricted, that is, when the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the rotation of the second gear is regulated in both forward and reverse directions, so that the displacement member held in the raised position causes rattling. Can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is allowed to rotate in a direction in which the displacing member is lowered in a state in which the displacing member is arranged in a raised position.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rotation of the first gear in the direction in which the displacing member is lowered is allowed in the state in which the displacing member is arranged in the raised position. It is not necessary to separately perform the operation for releasing the contact between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear, and the first gear is rotated by the driving force of the drive means to move to the raised position. The held displacement member can be lowered. That is, the rotation of the second gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is restricted, while the rotation of the first gear in the direction of lowering the displacement member is allowed. Therefore, when the displacement member tries to descend from the raised position by its own weight, the predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, thereby restricting the rotation of the second gear and causing the displacement member to move. Can be held in the raised position. On the other hand, when the first gear is rotated, the second gear is rotated along with the rotation, and the displacement member can be lowered.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear is formed so as to be able to mesh with a predetermined tooth of the second gear when rotating in a direction of raising the displacement member, and A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the tooth depth of the first gear is lower than that of the teeth of the first gear, and the predetermined teeth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth crests thereof.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the contact portion of the first gear meshes with a predetermined tooth of the second gear during rotation in the direction of raising the displacement member. Since the tooth depth of the first gear is lower than that of the first gear, and predetermined teeth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the tooth crests of the first gear, the first gear moves upward in the displacement member. When the displacement member is rotated and the displacement member is disposed at the raised position, the second gear can be rotated in the direction in which the displacement member is raised through the contact portion and the meshing of predetermined teeth. As a result, the predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear (the contact portion of the first gear (the tooth tip surface) faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear). It can be reliably formed.

In the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the contact portion of the first gear has a tooth thickness larger than that of the teeth of the first gear, so that the predetermined tooth of the second gear contacts. A possible area can be secured. Therefore, the accuracy of the stop position of the first gear in the state where the displacement member is arranged at the raised position can be made gentle (the allowable amount can be increased). As a result, it is possible to reliably form a state in which the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear.

Further, the contact portion of the first gear is a portion that receives a predetermined tooth of the second gear and restricts rotation of the second gear (that is, supports the weight of the displacement member). Since it is made large, strength can be secured.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the contact portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth tip surface is curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the first gear as the center. ..

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the abutment portion of the first gear is formed such that the tooth tip surface thereof is curved in an arc shape with the center of rotation of the first gear as the center. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the first gear until a predetermined tooth of the second gear can be brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, while improving the strength of the first gear. Can be planned.

Further, when the second gear is rotated in the direction in which the displacing member is lowered and the predetermined teeth of the second gear are brought into contact with the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear, the predetermined gear of the second gear is It is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the first gear by setting the direction of the force acting from the teeth of the gears to the contact portion of the first gear as the direction toward the rotation axis of the first gear. As a result, it is possible to easily regulate the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends, and it is possible to reliably suppress the displacement member from descending by its own weight even if the driving force of the drive unit is released.

In the gaming machine A6, the second gear has a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile,
In a state in which the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, so that the first member is moved in the direction in which the displacement member is raised. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the rotation of gears is restricted.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the second gear is provided with a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the first gear is provided. Since the rotation of the first gear in the upward direction of the displacement member is restricted by the contact of the contact portion of the gear with the receiving portion of the second gear, It can function as a stopper that stops the rotation of the first gear after being placed in the raised position.

In the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the contact portion of the first gear toward the rotation axis of the second gear and an arc of the contact portion of the first gear. A gaming machine A8, which is formed by curving in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the shape.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the receiving portion of the second gear has a concave portion on the side facing the abutting portion of the first gear and is concave toward the rotary shaft of the second gear. Since it is formed to be curved in an arc shape having a diameter substantially equal to the arc shape of the abutment portion of the gear, when the abutment portion of the first gear abuts the receiving portion of the second gear, both surfaces are brought into contact with each other. The contact portion of the first gear can be firmly received by the receiving portion of the second gear. As a result, the function as a stopper for stopping the rotation of the first gear after the displacement member is arranged in the raised position can be reliably exerted in the receiving portion of the second gear.

Further, since the receiving portion of the second gear is curved in an arc shape that is concave toward the rotation axis of the second gear, it is possible to increase the tooth height on both sides in the tooth thickness direction, and the strength of the receiving portion. Can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the receiving portion of the second gear when receiving the contact portion of the first gear.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in a state in which the displacement member is arranged at the raised position, the meshing between the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear is released, and The gaming machine A9, wherein the displacement member is located at the end of a movable range in the upward direction.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, the contact portion of the first gear and the predetermined tooth of the second gear are Since the meshing of is disengaged and the displacement member is positioned at the end of the movable range in the upward direction, the displacement member is arranged in the elevated position by the rotation of the first gear in the direction of raising the displacement member. Later, it is possible to rotate only the first gear in the direction in which the displacement member rises while stopping the second gear. As a result, a state where the predetermined teeth of the second gear can contact the contact portion of the first gear (the contact portion (tooth surface) of the first gear faces the predetermined tooth of the second gear) Can be reliably formed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Structure of Connecting the First Passage Forming Member 520 and the Second Passage Forming Member 422 as an Example>
A first passage member and a second passage member are formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be delivered from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which no communication is established, the gaming machine is displaceably disposed at one end of one of the first passage member and the second passage member, and the first passage member or the first passage member A gaming machine B1 comprising a connecting member for communicating between one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member when the two passage members are in contact with the other and displaced.

Here, a first passage member and a second passage member that are formed so that a sphere can pass therethrough are provided, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other. The communication state in which the ball can be sent from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are not in contact with each other. There is known a game machine capable of forming a communication and a separated state (JP-A-2014-171636). In this case, it is inevitable that the stop position when the first passage member is displaced and the disposition position of the second passage member are varied due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of each component. Therefore, in the communicating state, the positions of the first passage member and the second passage member are displaced from each other, which makes it difficult to stably deliver a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, a state in which the gaming machine B1 is disposed at one end of one of the first passage member and the second passage member, and is in contact with the other of the first passage member and the second passage member and displaced. Since the connection member that connects the first passage member and the second passage member with each other is provided, even if the positions of the first passage member and the second passage member are deviated from each other Positional displacement can be absorbed by the displacement of the connecting portion interposed between them. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the ball delivery from the first passage member to the second passage member. Further, as the first passage member is displaced, the first passage member comes into contact with the connecting member to displace the connecting member, so that the driving force for displacing the first passage member can also be used, and the connecting member is displaced. It is not necessary to separately provide a driving force for driving.

In the gaming machine B1, the connection member includes one side wall portion and another side wall portion that are arranged opposite to each other with an opening at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member interposed therebetween, and the one side wall portion is When the first passage member is displaced on the displacement path of the first passage member and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. The gaming machine B2, wherein the connecting member is displaced so that the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to one end of the other of the first passage member and the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, when the first passage member is displaced and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member. Since the connecting member is displaced and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is brought close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member, the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member are connected in the communicating state. It is possible to make the first passage member and the second passage member closer to one end, and it is possible to easily absorb the positional deviation between the ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end thereof as a rotation tip side, and the connection member is a rotation shaft parallel to the rotation shaft of the first passage member. When the first passage member is rotated, and the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member is brought into contact with one side wall portion of the connection member, the connection member is rotated, A gaming machine B3, wherein the other side wall portion of the connecting member is close to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, a communication state is formed by rotating the first passage member with one end of the first passage member being the rotation tip side, and the connecting member is the first passage. Since the rotary shaft that is parallel to the rotary shaft of the member is provided, the displacement (rotation) of the connection member that accompanies the displacement (rotation) of the first passage member can be smoothly performed. Further, by utilizing the rotational movement of both, the other side wall portion of the connecting member can be brought closer to the other end of the first passage member or the second passage member.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the communicating state, one of the facing surfaces of the one side wall portion and the other side wall portion of the connecting member is a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. A gaming machine B4, wherein the gaming machine B4 is a rolling surface when a ball is sent, and in the communicating state, the one opposing surface is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, it is possible to stabilize the ball feeding in the communicating portion between the one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member. That is, since the position where the first passage member and the second passage member communicate with each other at one end is large in positional deviation, the ball feeding becomes unstable, and the rolling surface of the ball is formed in the communication portion. Since one of the facing surfaces is inclined downward from the first passage member toward the second passage member, it is possible to roll the ball and stabilize the ball feeding.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the balls in the first passage member are allowed to be fed from one end of the first passage member in the communication state, and the balls in the first passage member in the released state. A game machine B5, comprising a ball-sending regulation means that regulates a ball from being fed from one end of the first passage member.

Here, in the released state, one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member so that the first passage member and the second passage member are not in communication with each other. When the ball is supplied to the passage member, the ball passing through the first passage member may fall out of the game area. Further, in the communication state, even if the sphere is supplied to the first passage member, if the sphere stays in the first passage member for some reason and shifts to the release state in that state, the first passage member There is a risk that the ball that has stayed at will fall into the game area. If the ball falls outside the game area, the movement of the movable member such as a gear or a crank mechanism may be hindered, or the ball may be pinched, resulting in damage to the movable member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the ball in the first passage member is allowed to be fed from one end of the first passage member in the communicating state. In addition, since the sphere in the first passage member is provided with a ball-sending regulation means for regulating the sphere in the first passage member from being sent from one end of the first passage member in the released state, for example, when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, Even when the ball is retained in the first passage member and the communication state is changed to the release state, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the gaming machine B5, a cover body is provided at one end of the first passage member, which permits passage of the ball in the communication state and regulates passage of the ball in the released state, and the cover body controls the ball feeding. A gaming machine B6 characterized by forming means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, one end of the first passage member is a cover as a ball sending regulation means that allows passage of the ball in the communicating state and regulates passage of the ball in the releasing state. Since the body is provided, for example, when the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or when the sphere remains in the first passage member and the communication state changes to the released state, the first passage It is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the member.

In the gaming machine B5, a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position that restricts passage of the ball, and acts on the cover body with displacement of the first passage member. And an operating member that displaces the cover body in a direction that allows passage of the ball when at least the communication state is formed, and the gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the gaming machine B7 includes a biasing member that applies a biasing force to the cover body to maintain the cover body at a position for restricting passage of a ball, so that the cover is in the released state. It is possible to prevent the body from being displaced carelessly, and as a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. On the other hand, when the communication state is formed, the cover body is displaced in the direction that allows the passage of the sphere, so that the sphere can be delivered from the first passage member to the second passage member.

In this case, the displacement of the cover body in the direction in which the passage of the sphere is allowed is accompanied by the displacement of the first passage member by the action of the action member, so that the drive means for displacing the first passage member displaces the cover body. It can also be used as a driving means for driving, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The acting member is positioned on the displacement trajectory of the cover body due to the displacement of the first passage member, and abuts on the cover body displaced along the displacement trajectory to resist the biasing force of the biasing member. To displace the cover body in a direction permitting passage of a sphere (for example, a second passage member, a connecting member, a member fixed to a game board, etc.), or a driving force of a drive means for displacing the first passage member. To the cover body to displace the cover body together with the displacement of the first passage member (for example, a gear or a rack and pinion for converting the driving means and the driving force into a rotational movement or a linear movement and transmitting the same to the cover body). ) Is illustrated.

In the gaming machine B5, the ball-sending regulation means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is the uppermost position in the released state.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball-sending regulation means arranges the first passage member in a posture in which one end of the first passage member is the uppermost position in the released state. Even if the ball is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or even if the ball moves from the communication state to the released state while the ball remains in the first passage member, the ball goes out of the game area from one end of the first passage member. It can be prevented from falling.

In the released state, the first passage member arranged such that one end of the first passage member is located at the uppermost position does not require that the entire first passage member is inclined upward. There may be a horizontal or downward sloping region.

In the gaming machine B5, the ball feeding restricting means is arranged such that, in the released state, the first passage member is arranged in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member toward one end. Amusement machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the ball sending restricting means is arranged in a posture in which the first passage member is inclined upward from the other end of the first passage member toward the one end in the released state. Therefore, for example, even if the sphere is supplied to the first passage member in the released state, or even if the sphere remains in the first passage member and the communication state changes to the released state, Can be easily prevented from falling outside the game area.

Further, in the case of forming the communication state, it is possible to form a state in which the entire first passage member is inclined downward from the other end toward the one end, so that it is possible to easily send a ball from the first passage member to the second passage member. , It is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the way. Therefore, when the state shifts to the released state, it is possible to prevent the ball retained in the first passage member from dropping into the game area.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a case body having an upstream passage and a downstream passage through which a ball can pass, a one-side position for distributing the ball flowing down from the upstream passage to the first passage, and A distribution member that is displaced between positions on the other side that distribute the sphere flowing down from the upstream passage to the downstream passage, and the case body is formed such that both sides in the displacement direction of the distribution member are open. A gaming machine B10 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the case body is formed so that both sides in the displacement direction of the sorting member are open, so that the one side position or the other side position is obtained. Even if the sphere flows down between the distribution member and the case body that are displaced toward each other, it is possible to prevent the sphere that has flowed down from being sandwiched between the distribution member and the case body.

In the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and when the communication state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the distribution member is arranged at the one side position, The gaming machine B11, wherein when the released state is formed by the displacement of the first passage member, the sorting member is arranged at the other side position.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, and the displacement members are arranged at the one side position and the other side position in accordance with the displacement of the first passage member. Therefore, the drive means for displacing the first passage member can also be used as the drive means for displacing the distribution member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Here, in the structure in which the distribution member is displaced independently of the first passage member, for example, when a displacement state between the distribution member and the first passage member is deviated due to occurrence of poor control, the release state is released. The balls are distributed to the first passage member (i.e., the distribution member is arranged at one side position), and there is a risk that the balls fall from one end of the first passage member to the outside of the game area. On the other hand, in the gaming machine B10, the distribution member is formed in the first passage member, so the displacement states of the distribution member and the first passage member can be always synchronized. Therefore, even if control failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the balls from being distributed to the first passage member in the released state (that is, when the released state is formed, the distribution member is always in the other side position). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from falling out of the game area from one end of the first passage member.

In the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that partitions a passage through which a ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member serves as the distribution member.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B11, the first passage member includes a wall portion that partitions a passage through which the ball passes, and the wall portion of the first passage member serves as a distribution member. It is possible to reduce the cost of parts by sharing the parts. In addition, by using a wall member that divides a passage through which the sphere passes as a distributing member, the sorted sphere can surely flow down into the passage.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Structure for Limiting Rebound of the Driven Side Slide Member 430 as an Example>
A guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and the displacement member is supported at the descending position. A support member and an elevating member formed to be able to ascend and descend along the guide member are provided, and the displacement member is elevated from the descending position to the ascending position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises. In addition, in the gaming machine in which the displacement member is lowered from the raised position to the lowered position by its own weight as the lifting member is lowered, when the displacement member is lowered to the lowered position, the displacement member moves in the rising direction. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a rise regulating member for regulating displacement.

Here, a guide member extending in the vertical direction, a displacement member guided by the guide member and displaceable along the guide member between an ascending position and a descending position, and the displacement member are supported at the descending position. A supporting member and an elevating member that can be moved up and down along the guide member, and the displacement member is raised from the lowered position to the raised position by being pushed up by the elevating member as the elevating member rises, There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is lowered by its own weight from a raised position to a lowered position as the lifting member is lowered (JP-A-2014-233494). In this case, the displacement member lowered by its own weight along the guide member is placed on the support member and supported by the support member, so that the displacement member is maintained at the lowered position. However, since the displacement member is placed on the support member and can be displaced in the ascending direction along the guide member, rattling easily occurs due to disturbance, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position There was a problem that was unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the displacement member is provided with the ascending regulation member that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the ascending direction when the displacement member is descended to the descending position, the displacement member is arranged along the guide member at the descending position. Displacement in the ascending direction can be regulated, and rattling due to disturbance can be suppressed. As a result, the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position can be stabilized.

The gaming machine C1 is provided with a biasing means for biasing the rise restricting member in a direction approaching the displacement member, and the displacement member comes into contact with the rise restricting member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight. And a separating action portion that displaces the lift restricting member in a direction in which the lift restricting member is separated from the displacement member, and allows the lift restricting member to displace in a direction in which the lift restricting member approaches the displacement member in the descending position and A gaming machine C2, comprising: an engaging portion that engages.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the displacement member displaces the lift restricting member in the direction of separating from the displacement member when the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, and the descending position. Since the lifting restricting member is engaged with the engaging part, the restricting state by the lifting restricting member can be formed only by the operation of lowering the displacement member to the lowered position by its own weight, and the restricting state by the rising restricting member is formed. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for doing so. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, the engagement between the lift restricting member and the engaging portion is performed after allowing the lift restricting member to be displaced in the direction in which the lift restricting member approaches the displacement member. The force required to release the engagement and the displacement of the lift restricting member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the engagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion even when the disturbance is input.

In the gaming machine C2, the disengagement of the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacing member is performed by raising the elevating member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member, so that the displacement member is disturbed. Even when the input is to be rattled, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member from being accidentally released.

Further, since the disengagement between the ascending regulation member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for releasing the engagement, The drive source for raising and lowering the member can be used also as the drive source for releasing the engagement between the ascending regulation member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. ..

Furthermore, in the case where a separate drive source is provided for releasing the engagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member, for example, due to poor control, the engaging part between the rising restricting member and the displacement member is Where the engagement member is not released, there is a risk that the elevating member may rise and push up the displacement member. According to the gaming machine C3, however, the engagement between the elevation regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member may be released. Since it is possible to perform the operation of pushing up the displacement member by the raising/lowering member as the raising/lowering member rises, when the displacement member is pushed up by the raising/lowering member, the engagement between the raising regulation member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is performed. Can be reliably released.

In the gaming machine C3, the elevating member is brought into contact with the elevating restricting member when the elevating member is ascended to displace the elevating restricting member so that the engaging part between the elevating restricting member and the displacing member. A gaming machine C4, which is provided with a release action portion for releasing the engagement.

Here, the disengagement between the rising restricting member and the engaging portion of the displacement member can be released by the pushing force when pushing up the displacement member as the elevating member moves up and down. Therefore, it is necessary to make the engagement state such that it can be released, and it becomes difficult to firmly engage. Further, in this case, when the engagement is released, the reaction thereof causes a vibration, which makes the posture of the displacement member unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, the elevating member comes into contact with the elevating regulating member when the elevating member is elevated and displaces the elevating regulating member, thereby ascending regulation. Since the releasing action portion for releasing the engagement between the member and the engaging portion of the displacement member is provided, the release is surely released even when the rising regulating member and the engaging portion of the displacement member are firmly engaged. be able to. In other words, since a strong engagement state can be formed, rattling of the displacement member due to disturbance can be suppressed, and the posture of the displacement member in the lowered position can be stabilized. Further, it is possible to suppress the vibration due to the reaction when the engagement is released, and to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the lift restricting member serves as the elevating member that elevates and lowers the displacement member between the descending position and the ascending position in a state where the engagement of the displacement member with the engaging portion is released. A gaming machine C5, which is abutted.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, the lift restricting member displaces the displacement member between the lowered position and the raised position in a state where the engagement of the displacement member with the engaging portion is released. Since it abuts on the elevating member to be raised and lowered, it can function as a guide guide and suppress rattling when the elevating member is raised and lowered. As a result, the posture of the displacement member that moves up and down with the lifting member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine C5, the raising restricting member that comes into contact with the elevating member is urged by the urging means in a direction of approaching the elevating member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the lift restricting member abutting on the elevating member is urged by the urging means in the direction approaching the elevating member, so that the elevating member is moved in a fixed direction. It can be urged to stabilize its posture. In addition, rattling of the elevating member can be suppressed by the elastic cushioning action of the biasing means.

The gaming machine C6 includes a driving unit, a pinion that is rotationally driven by the driving unit, and a rack that meshes with the pinion, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the elevating member is the A gaming machine C7, characterized in that the rack is urged by the urging means in a direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via an ascent control member.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, the rotational movement of the pinion rotationally driven by the drive means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the linear movement raises and lowers the elevating member along the guide member. It In this case, the elevating member is urged in the direction in which the rack is separated from the pinion via the ascent control member, so that the space between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized. That is, when the lifting member rattles in the direction in which the space between the tooth surfaces of the rack and pinion narrows, the biasing force of the biasing means acts in the direction in which the space between the tooth surfaces of the rack and pinion expands, while the spacing between the tooth surfaces of the rack and pinion expands. When the elevating member rattles, the guide structure by the guide member can prevent the distance from increasing more than a certain value. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surfaces of the rack and the pinion becomes narrow, and it is possible to prevent the mesh resistance from becoming excessive.

The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the raising/lowering member includes a lowering regulating member that regulates displacement of the elevating/lowering member in a descending direction when the displacement member is pushed up to the ascending position.

According to the gaming machine C8, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the lifting member pushes up the displacement member to the rising position, it is provided with the descending regulation member that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction. The displacement member and the elevating member that are provided can be supported by the descending regulating member. As a result, the driving force for holding the displacement member in the raised position can be eliminated, so that the energy consumption of the drive means for driving the elevating member can be suppressed.

Further, since the regulation by the lowering regulation member is performed by raising the elevating member, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for forming the regulation by the lowering regulation member, and the driving source for raising and lowering the elevating member. Can also be used as a drive source for forming the regulation by the descending regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine C8, the release of the regulation by the descending regulation member is performed by lowering the elevating member.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine C8, the restriction by the descending restricting member is released by lowering the elevating member, so it is necessary to separately provide a drive source for canceling such restricting. Therefore, the drive source for raising and lowering the elevating member can also be used as the drive source for canceling the regulation of the lowering regulation member, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

When a separate drive source is provided to release the regulation by the lowering regulation member, the elevating member is driven downward while the regulation by the lowering regulation member is not released due to the occurrence of control failure, for example. Where an overload acts on the source or the lowering regulating member may be damaged, according to the gaming machine C9, the regulation by the lowering regulating member can be released in accordance with the lowering operation of the elevating member. When lowering the elevating member, it is possible to form a state in which the regulation by the lowering regulation member is reliably released.

In the case where the descending regulation member is not an elevating member but a structure that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the descending direction, the structure in which the regulation by the descending regulating member is released as the elevating member descends is complicated. However, according to the gaming machines C8 and C9, since the descending regulation member has a structure that regulates the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction, the release of the regulation by the descending regulating member is accompanied by the descending of the elevating member. The structure to be performed can be simplified.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, in a state in which the displacement of the elevating member in the descending direction is regulated by the descending regulating member, the ascending regulating member is brought into contact with the elevating member, and the descending regulating member serves as the elevating member. A gaming machine C10, wherein a contacting direction and a direction in which the ascending restriction member is in contact with the elevating member are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine C10, in the gaming machine C8 or C9, the direction in which the lowering restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member is different from the direction in which the ascending restricting member comes into contact with the elevating member. It is possible to suppress rattling of the elevating member in different directions by the restricting member and the ascending restricting member. As a result, the posture of the lifting member can be effectively stabilized.

In the gaming machine C10, a drive means, a pinion rotatably driven by the drive means, and a rack with which the pinion is meshed are provided, the rack is disposed on the elevating member, and the descending regulation member is A gaming machine C11, which is brought into contact with the elevating member in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

According to the gaming machine C11, the rotational movement of the pinion rotationally driven by the drive means is converted into the linear movement of the rack, and the linear movement causes the elevating member to be moved up and down along the guide member. In this case, the rack (elevating member) can be displaced with respect to the pinion in a direction parallel to the tooth surface, and the lowering regulating member is brought into contact with the elevating member from a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack. Therefore, the rack (elevating member) can be restricted from being displaced with respect to the pinion in the direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in a state in which the displacement member is arranged in the lowered position, the ascent control member and the support member can contact the displacement member from one side and the other side sandwiching the guide member. A gaming machine C12, which is provided in each.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the lowered position, the one side and the other side with the guide member sandwiched by the raising regulating member and the supporting member. Are arranged so as to be able to contact the displacement member respectively, the rattling of the guide member toward the one side or the other side of the displacement member is regulated by the abutment of the rising regulating member or the supporting member. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the displacement member arranged at the lowered position from rattling due to the disturbance.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, in a state where the displacement member is arranged in the lowered position, the support member and the lift restricting member are in contact with the displacement member while changing their positions along the extending direction of the guide member. A gaming machine C13, wherein the gaming machine C13 is movably disposed, and the supporting member is disposed above the rise restricting member.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11, the support member and the lift restricting member are positioned along the extending direction of the guide member in the state where the displacement member is arranged in the lowered position. Since the displaceable member is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the displacement member, the rattling of the displaced member in the oblique direction can be regulated by the abutment of the rise regulating member and the support member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the displacement member arranged at the lowered position from rattling due to the disturbance.

In addition, since the support member is disposed above the lift restricting member, the support member does not hinder the lifting/lowering of the lifting/lowering member, and a space for lifting/lowering the lifting/lowering member can be secured. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be secured.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Structure in which the Detected Part 641 of the Rotating Member 640 is Detected by the Detection Sensor 684>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member that is movable and a detecting means that detects a moving position of the moving member, the detecting means is arranged on the moving member at unequal intervals along the moving direction. A gaming machine D1 comprising a plurality of detected parts to be provided and a plurality of detection sensors arranged on a movement locus of the detected parts.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a movable member that is rotatably formed and a detection unit that detects a rotational position of the movable member (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-46467). According to this gaming machine, the detection means includes a plurality of slits formed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the moving member, and a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion that are arranged to face each other with the slits interposed therebetween, and the light receiving portion receives light. The number of pulses of the pulsed signal is cumulatively added, and the rotation amount (that is, the rotational position) of the moving member from the reference position is detected based on the cumulatively added number of pulses. However, in this case, if a detection failure due to poor light reception of the light receiving unit occurs, a deviation occurs between the rotational position of the moving member and the cumulative addition number, and the rotational position of the moving member cannot be accurately detected. There was a problem. That is, when a detection failure occurs, it affects the subsequent detection result, and the influence on the detection result is accumulated every time the detection failure occurs.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the detecting means is arranged on the moving member at a plurality of detected parts arranged at unequal intervals along the moving direction thereof and on the movement locus of the detected part. Since the plurality of detection sensors are provided, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based on the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected based only on the current detection result detected by the plurality of detecting sensors, and the past detecting result of the detecting sensor is necessary for detecting the moving position of the moving member. Therefore, the moving position of the moving member can be accurately detected.

In the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of dividing members and is formed by connecting the plurality of dividing members along the moving direction, and the detected portion is one of the plurality of dividing members. Of the plurality of detection sensors, and the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the division members. Gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the moving member includes a plurality of dividing members and is formed by connecting the plurality of dividing members along the moving direction to detect a detected portion. Is disposed on a part of the plurality of dividing members and is not disposed on the remaining dividing members, and the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the basis of the arrangement intervals of the dividing members. Therefore, the combination of the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors can be made different each time the moving member is displaced by an amount corresponding to the arrangement interval of the dividing members. That is, the moving position of the moving member can be detected with the moving amount corresponding to the disposition interval of the dividing members as the minimum unit.

It should be noted that that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at intervals based on the arrangement interval of the division members means that the plurality of detection sensors are arranged at positions corresponding to any of the plurality of division members. Means that. That is, it means that each of the plurality of detection sensors is arranged at a position where it is possible to detect the presence or absence of the detected portion of the corresponding divided member.

In the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of dividing members have an interval narrower than the first interval. And a plurality of detection sensors are formed at a distance based on the arrangement interval of the dividing members in the first section, and the movement locus of the detected portion in the first section is A gaming machine D3, which is arranged on the top.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the moving member has a first section in which a plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval, and a plurality of dividing members are more than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the narrow second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

In this case, since the plurality of detection sensors are arranged on the movement locus of the detected part in the first section at intervals based on the arrangement interval (first interval) of the dividing members in the first section, The space required for disposing the detection sensor can be easily secured. In other words, it is not necessary to consider the space for disposing the detection sensor when setting the disposition interval (second interval) of the dividing members in the second section, and thus the second interval is more Can be set to a narrow interval. As a result, also from this point, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3, the split member includes a main body member in which the detected member is disposed, and link members whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. The link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent division member, so that the interval between the division member and the adjacent division member is increased or decreased, and the link member is displaced in the first section. The gaming machine D4, which reaches the end and is restricted from being displaced in a direction of widening the interval between the divided members adjacent to each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, both ends of the division member can be displaced to the main body member on which the member to be detected is disposed and the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent division member. A link member connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent divided member, the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased. And the structure for forming the second section can be simplified.

In this case, in the first section, the link member reaches the displacement end, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of widening the space between the adjacent division members, so that the detection target in the direction of widening the space is detected. It is possible to suppress the positional variation of the parts. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

The gaming machine D4 includes a base member on which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and the link member when the split member is displaced. And a link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member to be displaced, and the link guide portion is adjacent to the main body member. A game machine D5, wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the split member is changed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D4, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member when the split member is displaced, and a link guide portion that guides the link member. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body members of the adjacent split members. The interval between the split members can be increased or decreased in accordance with the change in the posture of the link member. That is, it is possible to form the first section and the second section by increasing or decreasing the interval between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by a link guiding portion of the base member, and the link guiding portion of the base member is slidably inserted into the guided portion of the link member. A gaming machine D6, wherein the gaming machine D6 is formed in a groove shape, and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the link member includes a guided portion guided by the link guide portion of the base member, and the link guide portion of the base member guides the link member. Since the portion is formed in a groove shape slidably inserted and the groove width is set to a dimension corresponding to the outer shape of the link member, the link member can be easily maintained at the displacement end in the first section. With this, it is possible to reliably regulate the displacement of the division member in the direction of widening the space between the adjacent division members, and it is possible to suppress the position variation of the detected portion in the direction of widening the space. The detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member that is displaceably arranged in the main body member, and abuts on the main body member of the adjacent division members in the first section. The game machine D7, wherein the displacement member is displaced to a position, and the division member is restricted from being displaced in a direction in which a space between the division member and an adjacent division member is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D4 to D6, the division member includes a displacement member displaceably arranged in the main body member, and in the first section, the division members adjacent to each other are provided. Since the displacement member is displaced to the position where it abuts against the main body member and the division member is restricted from being displaced in the direction of narrowing the gap between the adjacent division members, the detected portion in the direction of narrowing the gap is detected. It is possible to suppress the position variation. As a result, the detection accuracy of the detection sensor can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Structure of the Moving Member 640 to Adjust the Distance between the Dividing Members DV as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed so as to be movable, the movable member includes a plurality of divided members and is formed by connecting the plurality of divided members along a movement direction. A first section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a first interval, and a second section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that a section is formed.

Here, a gaming machine including a movable member that is rotatably formed is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of identification information is displayed on the front surface of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position, so that the effect can be performed. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the moving member becomes large in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, the number of identification information items displayed is reduced when the moving member is reduced in diameter.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the moving member has a first section in which the plurality of division members are connected at the first interval and a plurality of the division members in an interval narrower than the first interval. Since the second section connected at the second interval is formed, the length of the moving member can be shortened as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. As a result, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the plurality of dividing members while securing the number of dividing members. Therefore, for example, when the identification information is displayed on each divided member, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the moving member while ensuring the number of displayed identification information.

In the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member, and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member, respectively. The gaming machine E2, wherein the distance between the divided member and the adjacent divided member is increased or decreased by being displaced with respect to the main body of the adjacent divided member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the split member includes a main body member and a link member whose both ends are displaceably connected to each of the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent split member. In order to form the first section and the second section, the link member is displaced with respect to the main body member and the main body portion of the adjacent division member to increase or decrease the interval between the division member and the adjacent division member. The structure of can be simplified.

The gaming machine E2 includes a base member on which the split member is displaceably arranged, and the base member guides the main body guide portion for guiding the main body member and the link member when the split member is displaced. And a link guide portion that acts on the link member when the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member to be displaced, and the link guide portion is adjacent to the main body member. A game machine E3, wherein the attitude of the link member with respect to the main body member of the split member is changed.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the base member includes a main body guide portion that guides the main body member when the split member is displaced, and a link guide portion that guides the link member. When the main body member is guided by the main body guide portion of the base member and is displaced, the guide portion acts on the link member to change the posture of the link member with respect to the main body member and the main body members of the adjacent split members. The interval between the split members can be increased or decreased in accordance with the change in the posture of the link member. That is, it is possible to form the first section and the second section by increasing or decreasing the interval between the dividing members while moving the moving member.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the dividing member includes a displacing member that is displaceably arranged on the main body member, and the displacing member has a posture tilted toward the adjacent dividing member in the first section. At the same time, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the second section has an upright posture than the posture in the first section.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the displacement member is tilted to the side of the adjacent division member in the first section, so that the displacement member can be visually recognized by the player. Can be made easier. Therefore, for example, when displaying the identification information on the displacement member, the visibility of the identification information to the player can be enhanced. Further, in the first section, the space between the division members is widened, so that a space for tilting the displacement member can be secured, and the displacement member can be increased in size accordingly. Therefore, also from this point, the visibility of the displacement member, that is, the visibility of the identification information can be improved.

On the other hand, in the second section, the displacement member is in a more upright posture than the posture in the first section, so that the displacement member can be separated from the main body members of the adjacent division members, and the main body members are correspondingly separated from each other. Can be brought closer together to reduce their spacing. That is, the second interval in the second section can be narrowed. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is displaceably disposed on the upper surface of the main body member, and is disposed above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent split member in the second section. Gaming machine E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is disposed displaceably on the upper surface of the main body member, and in the second section, above the upper surface of the main body member of the adjacent division member. Since it is arranged, interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, the main body members can be brought close to each other until they come into contact with each other, and the distance between them can be made narrower. That is, the second interval in the second section can be made narrower. As a result, the length of the moving member can be shortened, and the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E3, the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular orbit, the gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the orbit of the main body guide portion of the base member is formed in a circular shape, so that the main body guide portion of the base member is guided to displace the main body member. Can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E3, the track of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape connects all of the plurality of dividing members in the circumferential direction at the first interval. A gaming machine E7, which has a radius equal to that of a circular arrangement.

Here, a plurality of division members are connected in the circumferential direction at a first interval, and a plurality of division members are connected in the circumferential direction at a second interval that is narrower than the first interval. When the second section is formed in the moving member (hereinafter referred to as “the former case”), the moving member is compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval (hereinafter referred to as the “latter”). Since the length in the circumferential direction can be shortened, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the plurality of dividing members while securing the number of dividing members. However, when the orbits of the plurality of divided members are formed in a circular shape, the radius in the former case is made smaller than the radius in the latter case. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the divided members in the first section in the former case, the actual number as the total number of divided members forming the moving member is based on the number and the radius of the divided members in the first section. Reminiscent of less than.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the track of the dividing member in the first section is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of the arc shape is equal to that of the plurality of dividing members. Since the radius is the same as the radius when connecting in the circumferential direction at the first interval and arranging in a circular shape, the number of the plurality of dividing members is secured and the space required for arranging the plurality of dividing members is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to remind the player of the total number of divided members forming the moving member, which corresponds to the actual number.

<About the concept of the invention with the drive mechanism 630 as an example>
A base member having a guide portion extended, a moving member formed by connecting a plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member, and a driving force applied to the moving member. A drive unit, and the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing member to set a distance between the dividing members to a first distance; A second guide portion for setting a distance between the division members at a narrow second distance, and the drive means includes a rotation drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the division member, and the rotation drive thereof. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that the plurality of divided members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by rotating the member while engaging the engaging portion with the divided member.

Here, a gaming machine including a movable member that is rotatably formed is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-115426). In this case, for example, a plurality of identification information is displayed on the front surface of the moving member along the circumferential direction, and the player can visually recognize the identification information arranged at a predetermined position, so that the effect can be performed. However, in consideration of the visibility of the player, it is necessary to secure a certain size or more of the identification information. Therefore, if the number of displayed identification information is increased, the moving member becomes large in diameter and necessary for the arrangement. While the space is increased, the number of identification information items displayed is reduced when the moving member is reduced in diameter.

Therefore, the applicant of the present application forms a moving member by connecting a plurality of dividing members, and a section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected to the moving member at a first interval and a narrower interval than the first interval. By forming a section in which a plurality of dividing members are connected at a second interval of the intervals, the number of dividing members is ensured while the number of the plurality of dividing members is ensured, as compared with the case where the whole is connected at the first interval. The space required for disposing the dividing member can be suppressed, that is, when the identification information is displayed on each dividing member, the space required for disposing the moving member can be suppressed while ensuring the number of display of the identification information. Was conceived.

However, to the moving member to which the plurality of dividing members are connected, the section in which the plurality of dividing members are connected at the first interval and the plurality of dividing members are connected at the second interval that is narrower than the first interval. There is a problem that it is difficult to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine F1, the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing member to set the gap between the dividing members to the first gap, and the first gap is narrower than the first gap. A second guide portion for setting a distance between the divided members to a second distance, and the drive means includes a rotary drive member having an engagement portion engageable with the divided member, and the rotary drive member is engaged with the rotary drive member. Since the plurality of dividing members are displaced along the guide portion of the base member by being rotated while engaging the portions with the dividing members, the interval between the dividing members is wide and narrow (the first interval is smaller than the first interval). It is possible to displace the moving member with respect to the base member while forming the section and the section of the second interval) on the moving member.

In the gaming machine F1, a plurality of the engaging portions are formed on the rotation driving member, and the gaming machine F2 is provided.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, a plurality of engaging portions are formed on the rotary driving member, so that the efficiency of transmission of the driving force from the rotary driving member to the moving member can be improved. You can

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the moving member is formed by endlessly connecting the plurality of divided body members in the circumferential direction, and the drive means includes two rotation drive members, and rotations of the two. A game machine F3, wherein the driving members are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, since the two rotary driving members are arranged at different positions along the circumferential direction of the moving member, the rotary driving member is imparted to the moving member. The driving force can be distributed to different positions of the moving member in the circumferential direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress uneven application of the driving force to a part of the plurality of divided members and stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of divided members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the second rotary drive members are 180 degrees out of phase with each other in the circular orbit. A gaming machine F4, which is characterized in that the gaming machine F4 is arranged at a different position.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the orbits of the plurality of division members displaced along the guide portion of the base member are circular, and the two rotary drive members are circular orbits. Since they are arranged at positions where the phases are different from each other by 180 degrees, it is possible to apply the driving force from the rotary driving member to the two most separated positions of the moving member (plurality of dividing members). The displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the second rotation drive member is such that while the engagement portion of one rotation drive member is disengaged from the split member, the engagement portion of the other rotation drive member. A gaming machine F5, wherein the engaging portions are arranged so that the phases thereof are different from each other so that the engaging portions are engaged with the dividing member.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the two rotary drive members are provided while the engaging portion of one rotary drive member is disengaged from the split member. Since the engaging portions of the rotary drive member are arranged so that the engaging portions of the rotary drive member are engaged with the split member, the engaging portions of one rotary drive member and the other rotary drive member have different phases. It is possible to avoid disengagement of the engaging portion and the split member at the same time, and it is possible to prevent intermittent transmission of the driving force from the rotary drive member to the moving member. Thereby, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

That is, in the configuration in which a plurality of dividing members are connected in an endless manner as in the present invention, when the driving force is intermittently transmitted from the rotary driving member to the moving member, the driving force is transmitted and released to divide the driving force. Since the distance between the members is increased or decreased, the posture of the moving member as a whole becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F5, one of the engaging portion of the one rotary drive member and the engaging portion of the other rotary drive member is always engaged with the split member, and the moving force is always applied to the moving member. Since it is possible to form a state in which is transmitted, it is possible to easily maintain a constant interval between the divided members. As a result, even if the moving member is formed by endlessly connecting a plurality of dividing members, the posture thereof can be stabilized. That is, the displacement can be stabilized.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of divided members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotation drive means is engaged, and the engaged portion is a trajectory of the plurality of divided members. A gaming machine F6, characterized in that the gaming machine F6 is arranged on the outer peripheral side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the plurality of split members include an engaged portion with which the engaging portion of the rotation driving means is engaged, and the engaged portion thereof. Since the part is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the tracks of the plurality of divided members, the amount of rotation of the moving member (the plurality of divided members) with respect to the amount of rotation of the rotary drive member can be reduced. That is, since the reduction ratio can be reduced, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be correspondingly increased.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotation driving member is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the dividing member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions. A gaming machine F7 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the rotary drive member is a split member guided along the first guide portion of the guide portions, that is, between the split members. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged with the divided member guided in the state where the distance is widened, it is possible to suppress the interference between the adjacent divided member and the rotation driving member, and the rotation driving member accordingly. The diameter of can be increased. As a result, the drive torque applied from the rotary drive member to the moving member can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F7, the guide portion of the base member acts on the dividing member that is displaced along the guide portion, so that the distance between the dividing members is set to the first distance or the second distance. A third guide part that makes a transition from the interval to the second interval or the first interval, and the rotation drive member is provided on the dividing member that is guided along the third guide part of the guide parts. A gaming machine F8, characterized in that the engaging portion is arranged at a position where it can be engaged.

According to the gaming machine F8, in the gaming machine according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the rotation driving member is a division member guided along the third guide portion of the guide portions, that is, an adjacent division. Since the engaging portion is arranged at a position where the engaging portion can be engaged with the dividing member whose gap with the member is changed from the first gap or the second gap to the second gap or the first gap, The division member that receives a relatively large reaction force from the (third guide portion) can be directly driven by the rotation driving member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member formed by connecting the plurality of divided members from bending in the middle, and stabilize the displacement of the moving member.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is a main body member that is displaced along the guide portion, and one end of which is rotatably connected to the main body member, and the other is a main body member of an adjacent split member. A link member whose end is slidably connected, and one end and the other end of the link member are rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and a main body member of an adjacent split member, respectively, to thereby form the split member and The spacing between the adjacent division members is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is a main body member of the division member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent division member is slidably connected to the engaging member. Also, the gaming machine F9, characterized in that one end of the link member is engaged with a position close to a rotatably connected portion.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the split member is connected to the main body member that is displaced along the guide portion, and one end is rotatably connected to the main body member. A link member, the other end of which is slidably connected to a main body member of an adjacent split member, and one end and the other end of the link member are respectively rotated and slid with respect to the main body member and the main body member of the adjacent split member. As a result, the distance between the split member and the adjacent split member is increased or decreased, and the engaging portion of the rotation driving member is the main body member of the split member, and the other end of the link member of the adjacent split member is slidably connected. Since the one end of the link member is engaged at a position closer to the rotatably coupled part than the part, when the main body member of the split member is driven by the rotation driving member and displaced along the guide portion, The displacement of the main body member can be easily transmitted to the main body members of the adjacent divided members via the link member. As a result, the displacement of the moving member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5, a gaming machine F10 is provided, which is provided concentrically with a circle which is a track of the plurality of divided members, and which is provided with drive gears which are respectively meshed with the two rotary drive members.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, since the driving gears respectively engaged with the two rotary driving members are provided, the driving gears are rotated to synchronize the two rotary driving members. Can be rotated in the state of being. As a result, the rotation of the moving member can be stabilized. In this case, since the drive gear is arranged concentrically with the circle which is the orbit of the plurality of division members, the drive gear and the rotary drive member of 2 are the moving members (the plurality of division members) in the front view of the base member. Can be arranged inward of the outer circumference of the movement locus. That is, since the drive gear and the rotary drive member of 2 are not projected outward from the outer shape of the moving member, the size can be reduced accordingly.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B11, C1 to C13, D1 to D7, E1 to E7 and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a driving means, a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the driving means, and a displacement member that is displaced between the raised position and the lowered position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. A game machine provided is known. (Patent document 1: 2012-80941 gazette).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement member is lowered by its own weight, there is a problem that energy consumption for holding the displacement member increases.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing energy consumption when holding a displacement member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1 is a driving means, a transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, and a rising position and a descending position by the driving force transmitted by the transmission member. And a displacement member that is displaced between the first transmission gear and the first transmission gear. A second gear arranged on the member side, the first gear includes an abutting portion formed on a part of a tooth profile of the first gear, and in a state in which the displacement member is arranged in the raised position, The predetermined tooth of the second gear is brought into contact with the contact portion of the first gear, whereby the rotation of the second gear in the direction in which the displacement member descends is restricted.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the second gear has a receiving portion formed in a part of its tooth profile, and the displacement member is arranged in a raised position. In this state, the contact portion of the first gear is brought into contact with the receiving portion of the second gear, so that the rotation of the second gear in the upward direction of the displacement member is restricted.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first gear in a direction in which the displacing member is lowered in a state in which the displacing member is arranged at an ascending position. Is allowed to rotate.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, energy consumption can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the displacement member can be lowered.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
100-104 board box
4 22 second passage forming member (second passage member)
4 22f accommodation recess ( accommodation portion )
424 connection member
424e torsion spring (biasing means)
5 20,2520 1st passage formation member (1st passage member)
2521a2 recessed part (accommodation part)
2522b1 recessed part (accommodation part)
2 562 Torsion spring (biasing means)

Claims (2)

A first passage member and a second passage member are formed so that a ball can pass therethrough, and at least the first passage member is displaced so that one ends of the first passage member and the second passage member are communicated with each other. A communication state in which a ball can be delivered from the first passage member to the second passage member, and one end of the first passage member is separated from one end of the second passage member, and the first passage member and the second passage member. In a gaming machine capable of forming a separated state in which is not connected,
The first passage member is displaceably disposed at one end of the first passage member or the second passage member, and is in the state of being displaced by abutting against the other of the first passage member or the second passage member. And a connecting member that communicates between the ends of the second passage member, and an urging unit that applies an urging force to the connecting member to maintain the connecting member at a predetermined position ,
Wherein one of the first passage member or second channel member, a game machine, wherein Rukoto includes a housing portion for accommodating the connection members. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images